Home

Virtuoso DX Console User`s Manual

1. K po oooO mmmo00000000 a a ko a KH jo y Ge j Display Track Pad Submaster Display se Ge y Sr uminaires Controls display Indicates current Pan amp Tilt Encoders or to build cues and effects monitor cursor submaster event status Intensity Encoder Soft Select Displays i y Used to store recall colors beams presets anaa eee GE bg Faders det groups macros snapshots and effects sed to activate playback of cues and effects and to control playback intensity Soft Encoders amp Display Six knobs and a display which can be mapped for control of various luminaire parameters and to set effect timing values 12 April 01 329 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Virtuoso DX Console Connections Console Macintosh Computer A Caution Set voltage selector switch Macintosh to proper setting Monitor Computer G t N FireWire GS e It as
2. A MAA AA AE 100 Button Array Vv 00 ar fee If IER os so I 7 so 9 oo Represents a group Century Buttons 0 900 Ss a fellol lal EE FEEF of 100 channels as Routes the 100 button array determined by the millennium and century to one of ten pages U buttons Select a single channel or multiple single channels Step 1 Press 000 or 1000 as required Step 2 Press 0 through 900 as required Button will light Step 3 Press button of channel number to be selected Button will light Step 4 To select multiple single channels continue selecting channels channel selections pile on Example To select channel 521 ensure that 000 button is not active press the page 500 button and then press 21 on the 100 button array 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 45 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Select a range of channels Step 1 Press 000 or 1000 as required Step 2 Press 0 through 900 as required Button will light Step 3 Press button of first channel number to be selec
3. determined by the millennium and century al buttons 12 April 01 331 VARE LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Manual Control Quick Reference Common operations and guidelines for using manual controls Intensity State Buttons e Full sets selected luminaires to full intensity 100 e Out sets selected luminaires to an out or inactive state no parameter data 0 level e Mark sets selected luminaires to a marked state 0 level e Zero sets selected luminaires to zero intensity hard zero 0 e Shutter Open and Closed is used with luminaire strobe or douser mechanisms For a more in depth explanation refer to Intensity States on page 110 Pan and Tilt e Flip causes selected luminaires to pan and tilt until the head is pointing in the same direction as before The head assembly pans 180 degrees and tilts as required so that the head points in the same direction DMX moving mirror luminaires will not respond to this command e Next and Last increment or decrement channel selection based on the default setting Special encoder functions accessed w Shift button e COLOR Encoder 4 WHEEL SPIN e IMAGE Encode
4. Part 3 Part 2 Part 1 Action 1 Step 1 Step 2 3 gt Step 3 Part 1 Part 3 Part 2 Action 2 Lp Step 1 Step 2 gt Step 3 _ Part 2 Part 1 Part 3 Action 3 p Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Part 3 Part 2 Part 1 Action 4 p gt Step 1 Step 2 3 Step 3 Action 5 _ Etc For example purposes actions are not necessarily complete sequences An action merely represents what happens at each stage of the effect whether it is a complete sequence or a portion of a sequence Default Settings The default settings for these attributes can be used to create basic effects Unless changed these settings will be stored into the effect during an effect store operation e Forward e Continuous e Cascade 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 121 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Creating Effects Int Seq 122 Creating Sets Sets can be created using the Effects Control panel or Sets window Once you have created some sets these can be used in combination with sequences to create effects A set consists of one or more parts Parts are made up of specified channels luminaire groups with the limitation that a channel may only appear once within the set Set 1 Set 2 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Set 0 One
5. Ca s To Power Expansion Connectors Note Any of the three Aux ports can be used to connect the Channel Select panel Step 2 Connect FireWire from console CPU port to either comm port 1 or 2 at Macintosh computer 8 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 1 Step 3 Connect USB cable from console USB port to either USB port 1 or 2 at Macintosh computer Step 4 Connect system comm cable Ethernet or Fiber to appropriate console SYSTEM COMM port Step 5 Connect power cable to console Console requires 2 0 A at 120 V 50 60 Hz or 1 0 A at 240 V 50 60 Hz Lock power cable in place by tightening retaining bracket as shown Hb Retaining Bracket Tighten screw to lock in place Step 6 Connect power cable to computer Ensure that voltage selector switch on back of computer is set correctly Step 7 If applicable connect Channel Select FireWire and power cables to console Keyboard Lock Unlock The pull out drawer for the Macintosh alpha numeric keyboard can be locked in place for transport To unlock drawer turn knob clockwise Once drawer has been pushed in turn knob counter clockwise to lock SS Se 74 YA SF SS NY CZ OS Soo E L CLS of el To Unlock 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 9 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE
6. IO Y Y fi H fi ji Clear All GNIf OS PENES E E ap Ke oy Z Store a new template Step 1 At touch screen select Timing Step 2 Setup screen as desired Step 3 Press Store Timing Template Button any one of the six buttons where you wish to store the template Recall a template Step 1 Press required Timing Template Button Note Once a template is recalled it may be necessary to press Enter to send values to luminaires 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 157 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 158 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 9 Special Features This chapter contains instructions for controlling luminaires with the console s advanced features and for copying and moving programmed data s Ad Hoc Groups e Advanced Control e Data Copy and Move e Function Keys 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 159 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 160 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SPECIAL FEATURES AD HOC GROUPS 9 Ad Hoc Groups Overview Storing Modifying and Recalling Groups on page 90 provided instruc
7. moe i 5 E y A moo SSI Colors Palette Shift button Snapshot ae ca es toggles between two z Hetal configurations gt D 12 D D 1s eg O O A Jalea Tu q 9 Ki a jee l 1 1 l Palette Shit Bank Function Presets Macros 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 69 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 70 Applying Selects Apply a Beam Step 1 Select required luminaire s for manual control Step 2 Access required page by pressing any one of five page buttons next to the Bank Function button Step 3 Press Beam Select Button for desired gobo Selected luminaires will change Apply a Color Step 1 Select required luminaire s for manual control Step 2 At Colors select display access required bank by pressing Function Bank plus desired bank 1 through 3 Step 3 Access required page by pressing any one of five page buttons next to the Bank Function button Step 4 Press Color Select Button of desired color Selected luminaires will change 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS GENERAL OPERATION A Select Displays Window The Select Displays window can be used to access Preset Color Beam Group Macro
8. A 8 if Sul Ae lle AR Me S Ke LA PKS A K St 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 141 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 142 Time Speed Formats Time Time controls the duration of change for any parameter Guidelines e Each parameter can have an individual time e Intensity can have both an up and down fade time The direction of the intensity transition at the time of playback determines which of those two values is used e Cue timing includes the movement of longest duration combination of delay and time and the longest intensity transition combination of delay and up down fade time e Filtered values contribute to these times e Masked values do not contribute to these times e A parameter cannot have both a time and a speed although it can have a time and delay or speed and delay Time is entered at the keypad in minutes and seconds seconds or seconds and tenths of seconds Maximum time entry is 59 59 Entering whole numbers will be interpreted as total seconds e 2 5 25 00 25 seconds e 9 0 90 00 90 seconds A colon is entered by pressing es 2 5 2 05 2 minutes 5 seconds Fractions of seconds are entered by pressing e 1 3 1 3 1 3 seconds es 5 5 1 2 second es 3 5 L 5 35 5 35 and 1 2 seconds Delay Delay time begins counting from cue execution and delays the playback of any par
9. Seq 1 Step 1 Step 2 ei Step 3 rn Seq2 LS Step 1 Li Step 2 el Step 3 Reverse Rev The sequence steps will run backward Step 3 Step 2 Step 1 and Rev then start over when the first step is reached Seq 1 Step 3 Step 2 Step 1 rn Seq2 LS Step 3 Step 2 Step 1 Oscillate Osc The sequence steps will run forward then in a reverse direction Osc forward then reverse etc Seq 1 Step 1 Lu Step 2 Step 3 Seq2 LS Sien Step 2 gt Step 1 Random Rand The console chooses which sequence steps to run in what order Rand and the timing used Seq 1 Step 2 Step 1 tel Step 3 Seq 2 LS Step 1 Step 3 Step 2 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 119 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Mode Mode determines how the sequence steps run in relationship to each other e e Break Each part makes one pass through each step on any individual cycle and then goes to its background state when not in a step Breaking Cascade Effect Action 1 Part 1 none none none Step 1 Li Step 2 Step 3 B State Part 2 Part 1 none none Action
10. Manua U s er Virtuoso DX Control Console 02 9668 0001 VARI NZ AN LITE ss yourse VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL VARI LITE Artisan VL20 and VLD are trademarks owned by Vari Lite Inc 201 Regal Row Dallas TX 75247 USA and are registered in the United States and other countries VL2000 VL2200 and the individual product designations VL2400 and the individual product designations Virtuoso VL1 VL2B VL2C VL2Q VL3 VL4 VL5 VL5Arc VL5B VL6 VL6B VL6C VL7 VL7B VLM APS6 CAT SPC 36 UDM AutoTruss SmartDMX Smart Repeater Series 100 Series 200 Series 300 DICHRO WHEEL DICHRO TUNE VACU DEP VARIXIMAGE VARIXBEAM VARIXLITE Visionary ArtisanVLQ and the Vari Lite Asterisk are also trademarks owned by Vari Lite Inc and the Vari Lite Asterisk are also trademarks owned by Vari Lite Inc VARIXLITEO products are protected by one or more of the following patents and other pending patent applications worldwide US Patents No 5 959 758 5 728 994 5 590 954 5 367 444 5 329 431 5 209 560 5 186 536 5 073 847 5 010 459 4 980 806 4 602 321 4 392 187 U S Design Patents No 366 712 359 574 Australia Patents No 703868 693691 683695 667109 657152 649264 646588 618559 586095 576400 575271 546433 Australia Design Reg No 126781 German Patents No
11. all AUX3 CPU d ele O seal Desk Lamp Brightness Adjustment Knob 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 11 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Operation Overview 12 Window Interaction Menus and Button Bar The Virtuoso application displayed in the monitor functions just as any standard Macintosh application A menu bar provides access to file management commands and Virtuoso system windows Virtuoso windows can also be accessed using the button bar at the bottom of each installed monitor Clicking the soft button with the cursor will open the window in the event it is closed bring it to the front if already open but hidden or close it if in the front Clicking the far left button with the underlined name will page through the button bars to provide access to different Virtuoso windows and nav igation controls Button bar Click to page through button bars Patch Os PATCH EDIT Live Channels 1 6 Entering Editing Window Data The Macintosh keyboard can be used to type in alpha numeric entries or select cells and fields in the windows e Pressing fn ots DI S 2 closes the entry field e Pressing automatically selects the next cell down in the column for editing e Pressing sist Io automatically selects the next cell up in the column for editing e Pressing selects the next cell or field in a row e Pressing sur Io selects the
12. Note For instructions on obtaining additional profiles refer to Obtaining Additional DMX Profiles on page 2 Importing Profiles Before Profiles will be available to show files they must be loaded into the console Profile folder Import Profiles ila Show File Mesadger Step 1 Insert Zip disk containing new Profile s into Sme A cn console Zip drive Lea romina Step 2 At File menu select Import Profiles Load inet Vata Profiles window will open AA Vadale Profiles Dora Windi Kiir Fage deixa Prini ES 12 April 01 277 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Step 3 Locate Profiles on your Zip disk select and click Open The Profile s will be copied to the console Profile folder 1 Ltr tt 1200 mara Pe Y tasar 05100 re C turar nando CI irtiri ii 7 AA C eisiaa 1 ich Cam Eeert Preet de wa da Sa orie C C Updating Show File Profiles In order to protect existing show files the console does not automatically update them with any newly imported Profiles If you desire to update an existing show file with a new profile s this can be done using the Update Profiles function Note To ensure that new profiles are properly installed reset NIF and or UDM units after profiles are updated Update Profiles lla Shoe File Menager Step 1 At File menu select Show File Manager Tava Ahi linport 30 berkaroaun Step 2 Select show file to open and click on Open icon A Pew
13. Soft Select Display REFERENCE FOLD OUTS El Bank Function Allows bank and mode selections when pressed Displays mode bank page and individual select information SA ON C Page Select Buttons 5 Selects one of five pages U r D Bank Function 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DN SN ZS SN SS DN fe a de DINO POD PO POS ee OSO ni ir lr NOOO A AG E PK MI Neco Ui Ey 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Select Buttons 20 Applies data to i i i i i selected channels LJ a I i es Bank Function 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 i vc a a N a N AS N e N AN a NA SA k e Nec og NA NU ax NA AA T 3 if N TN CN Di a y EN DN gt DN KT IK Junk Ka Jun Ju Ji Ji D n J 212 13 14 15 16 i 18 19 2 Palet
14. Undo The last store update or delete action taken on the console can be reversed with the undo command Undo the last store update delete command e Undo Enter 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 113 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL k DER Basic Playback After storing a cue it can be played back using a submaster Play a cue Step 1 At keypad press Cue n Enter or scroll through cue list to recall a cue Its number and label will be displayed in the command line display 52 set cue 52 Blwash Cue 52 Step 2 At desired submaster press Select to select submaster for playback function TIFE CIBIG Step 3 Press Load to place cue in submaster s Pending cue Fc m pending file Active cue Rdwash Step 4 Ensure Grand Master fader is set at full E i Shows autofollow time or Step 5 Ensure submaster fader is set at full cue execution timecif no E autofollow is specified Step 6 Press Go to play cue S or i Selects submast Step 7 Press Run to replay cue once it is active a GEES SE Play next cue y Loads cue EE pg The submaster always sequences placing the next l available cue in the pending file PIBYS active cUe pe ES e Press Go to play back pending cue A E Play previous cue Stops and steps Back through c
15. At 201 Enter moves Cues 1 5 to Cues 201 205 Cues 1 5 are now blank Note Preset Set or Seq can be substituted for Cue in the above examples 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 165 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Function Keys 166 Setting Function Key Option Selected keys from the Virtuoso command line keypad are mapped to the computer keyboard s function keys F1 F12 Pressing these will open a window which takes the place of command line functions such as Store Selective Store Delete At etc Note Computer keyboard quick keys are available for use in these windows Refer to Quick Keys on page 169 for instructions Using Function Keys Store Fl Step Step Step Step Step 1 5 e Plus is used with cue store operations Selecting Plus and 2 Press F1 Store window will open 3 4 Enter number for future recall Using windows set parameters for cue preset beam color group snapshot macro or board cue Select item to store Click OK clicking OK will store cue to next cue number according to increment shown in Encoder window Refer to Encoders Window on page 56 Selective Store F2 Step Step Step Step Step 1 v p Using windows set parameters you wish to modify or add in a cue or preset wis C marca Press F2 Selective Store window will 9 tancat_ _ox_J open Select Cue or Preset Enter range of
16. Enter Snap Shot Stores or recalls a snapshot used with Snapshot Filter window Example Store Snap Shot 5 Enter Sneak Works with Sneak Mode to provide manual control of luminaires Example Sneak 5 5 Speed Sets rate of change for a luminaire parameter used with touch screen Example Speed 1 Enter Step Stores an action into a step component of an effect sequence Example Step 1 Cue n Enter Store Initiates store actions Example Store Cue 2 3 Enter Sub Specifies a submaster for direct load Example Cue Sub 4 Enter Thru Defines a range selection Example lt Chan gt 1 Thru 5 Enter Time Enters a parameter time value used with touch screen Example Time 1 3 Enter Track Fill Feature not yet implemented Trail Adds a trail time to a cue Example Store lt Cue gt 5 Trail 1 Enter Undo Reverses the last store update or delete action Example Undo Enter Preset Stores or recalls a preset Example lt Chan gt 5 Preset 7 Enter Update Stores modified channels back into their source cues Example Update lt Cue gt 5 Enter 02 9668 0001A REFERENCE FOLD OUTS FI Commands for storing recalling and updating cues and presets Displays curren
17. Part 1 Select Button then while continuing to hold Store press Part 2 5 A ee Select Button etc to specify a range of parts E LJ which will contain the channels Channels Groups will load across parts according to the method chosen Interlaced or Sequential when Store is released 1 2 3 alolo Step 6 Label your set by pressing Label Set Select Button xxxxxx return Set 1 now contains parts and a label Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 6 7 8 9 10 Delete a part Step 1 Deselect all channels Step 2 Press Store Part Select Button of part you wish to delete Part will be deleted OP Press Delete Part Select Button of part you wish to delete Part will be deleted 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 123 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL From Sets Window Create a set Step 1 At Data menu select Sets Sets window will open Cue Daba Preset Deia Step 2 Using cursor select a Set Window will also respond to eee Set selections made at Effects panel Step 3 Load channels into individual parts Using cursor select a part b At channel fields type in a range of channels Legale Clute lolita c Click to assign channels to selected part Click to remove channels from selected part d Repeat Steps a through c as require
18. This prompts a dialog allowing you to save editing 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 33 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 34 Check online status Verify that the patch is correct by checking the online status of your luminaires Any channel that is up and running communicating and has all of its show data is considered online Step 1 At manual control panel press Online All online luminaires will light in Channel Palit d r Dimar Sees rrari Select window or Channel Select panel if Part installed Select Parked x GuickFecus Step 2 Press Online again to exit status mode Erase Lumtpare Date Note This can also be done using the menu command 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH EDITING 2 Patch Editing Editing Windows Once entered patch data can be edited at the Plan View window or Patch window Save changes by selecting Save Editing or Disable Editing at the Patch menu Plan View Depending on whether Patch Editing is enabled the Plan View window will be displayed differently With Patch Editing Enabled e Move icons to new locations with the selection tool while holding down the trackpad button e Select multiple icons by dragging a box around them or by holding down o button while selecting e Double click any icon to bring up its associated patch data window e Change the 3D height location Z coordinate of selected luminaires Refer to Changing
19. VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 288 Table 14 1 MIDI Note Mapping Continued MIDI Note Macro No MIDI Note Macro No A2 57 A5 93 Bb2 58 Bb5 94 B2 59 B5 95 C3 60 C6 96 C 3 61 C 6 97 D3 62 D6 98 Eb3 63 Eb6 99 E3 64 E6 100 F3 65 F6 101 F 3 66 F 6 102 G3 67 G6 103 G 3 68 G 6 104 A3 69 A7 105 Bb3 70 Bb7 106 B3 71 B7 107 C4 72 C7 108 C 4 73 C 7 109 D4 74 D7 110 Eb4 75 Eb7 111 E4 76 E7 112 F4 77 F7 113 F 4 78 F 7 114 G4 79 G7 115 G 4 80 G 7 116 A4 81 A8 117 Bb4 82 Bb8 118 B4 83 B8 119 C5 84 C8 120 C 5 85 C 8 121 D5 86 D8 122 Eb5 87 Eb8 123 ES 88 E8 124 F5 89 F8 125 F 5 90 F 8 126 G5 91 G8 127 G 5 92 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW CONTROL BY EXTERNAL DEVICES MIDI SMPTE TIMECODE 1 MIDI SMPTE Timecode Overview The console will also accept MIDI SMPTE timecode messages which can be generated internally or from an external source The messages generated by the internal timecode generator can be run independently or in sync with an external timecode If the external timecode source drops out the internally synchronized timecode allows the MIDI operation to continue When the internal clock is selected any external timecode will be ignored Note Only one form of timecode either MIDI or SMPTE can be input at one time Timecode is programmed and played back using the Timecode wi
20. f Und 7 Timg Y Allows stepping through each n A Se stored channel in a preset for the purpose of adjusting parameters this is an alternate console mode not yet implemented not yet implemented timing in luminaires Millennium Buttons E 000 routes control to first 7 MN 1000 channels 1000 routes control to 000 froo second 1000 channels When lit indicates range A mieniem A A A ee o selected 100 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 200 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 300 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 400 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 500 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 600 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 wl 700 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 800 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 900 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 Century Buttons 0 900 Routes the 100 button array to one of ten pages
21. removes the link instruction from Cue n Link a cue to a snapshot e lt Cue gt n Link Snap Shot x Enter links Snapshot x to Cue n Link a cue to a macro e lt Cue gt n Link Macro x Enter links Macro x to Cue n To link another cue to the currently selected cue press Link n Enter where n is the linked cue To link a snapshot macro or effect to the currently selected cue press Link Macro n Enter where n is the number of the macro you wish to link Snap Shot or Effect can be used instead of Macro To Effects A cue can either have data or recall an effect but not both When an effect is linked to a Cue the effect will be recalled when that cue number is played Link an effect to a cue e lt Cue gt n Link Effect x Enter links Effect x to Cue n 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Tip Q gt Shortcut gt ADVANCED CUE FEATURES SPECIAL CUE ATTRIBUTES 11 Loop Loop instructions are used in combination with link instructions to replay a sequence multiple times When a cue with a link and loop instruction is played back the linked cue will automatically be played back on the same submaster and then the original cue would be reloaded and the sequence would repeat as defined by the loop number After the defined number of loops the submaster will automatically load the next sequential cue into the submaster s pending file activating the next cue based on autofollo
22. 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 161 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Advanced Control Man Time Quick Focus 162 Manual Timing The Manual Timing feature is used to apply parameter times manually While Manual Timing is active any manual changes via the selects or the encoder buttons will follow the timing currently active in the luminaire Activate Manual Timing Manual Timing is an alternate control state It will be active until Man Time is de selected e At Manual Control panel press Man Time or at Special menu select Manual Timing QuickFocus The QuickFocus feature allows you to step sequentially through each stored channel in a selected preset to adjust its parameters The new parameter data can then be stored into the preset This allows you to easily isolate data so that it can be updated without affecting the remaining data in your preset QuickFocus is an alternate control state It will be active until it is de selected Update a preset with QuickFocus During QuickFocus the entire preset is brought up live and all other outputs are disabled as long as the console is still in QuickFocus mode Step 1 Press Quick Focus Console will assume QuickFo i H Tack Progress cus mode Or select QuickFocus from Special qc menu Fark Larra Select Parked Step 2 Select required preset by using preset select or keypad All luminaires that have data from that preset will be selected and w
23. 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS BEAMS A Label an existing Beam page or bank Note When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Step 1 Ensure Beams are selected on at least one select display Step 2 Press Label Beam Select Button xxxxxx return or Label Page Select Button xxxxxx return or Label Bank Select Button xxxxxx return as required Add a new luminaire type to a Beam If you are modifying a Beam by storing a new type of luminaire s then the new data will be added to the existing data Step 1 Select required channel s The channel should contain at least one different luminaire type than currently stored in the Beam Step 2 Ensure Beams are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 4 Filter attributes as required using touch screen display in Filter mode 5 Press Store Beam Select Button or Store Label Beam Select Button xxxxxx return Step Modify Beam data for an existing luminaire type If you are modifying a Beam with data from the same type of luminaire then the data will be replaced Step 1 Select required channel s The channel should contain the same luminaire type as currently stored in the Beam Step 2 Ensure Beams are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Using manual cont
24. De i PEO a US S a HoE cuyo e gt fe Te o A S Bi To Power To Optional Secondary Monitor Monitor Power Data SCH Channel Select Panel optional Power Cable FireWire N D DX Console i m lx 905 50 5 05 0 20 To Power Expansion Connectors Note Any of the three Aux ports can be used to connect the Channel Select panel Power and DMX Connections SYSTEM COMM Fiber Port System and External Device Connections Ethernet Port REFERENCE FOLD OUTS Mac Computer Auxiliary Components Power and Data Ports USB Port Channel Select Panel etc Mac Computer FireWire Port USB Device Ports Mouse trackball etc DESK LITE CO Switch Closure MIDI In Thru and SMPTE Input Trigger Port Out Connections Connection reserved Desk Lamp Connector Desk Lamp Desk Lamp Connector Console Power Cable Connection E DMX512 XLR 5 Pin Connectors Corresponds to DMX Universes 1 8 2 0 A 120 volts 50 60 Hz 1 0 A 240 vo
25. Out Time Out Time instructions may be stored into a cue An Out Time will provide a fade to no intensity level instruction to any luminaires that are going inactive in a cue Out Time also provides the time value that luminaires are to fade to inactive in the event the submaster is deselected The console has a setting for a default Out Time which is stored into all new cues where a different time is not specified The default setting is 3 seconds but can be changed universally in the Settings window Refer to Settings Window on page 245 to change the default Out Time Store a cue with an out time e Store lt Cue gt n Out Time x Enter stores Cue n with an out time of x Add an out time to a range of cues e lt Cue gt m Thru n Out Time x Enter adds an out time of x to the range of cues m through n Reset a cue s out time back to zero e lt Cue gt n Out Time Enter To add an out time to the currently selected cue press Out Time n Enter where n is the desired out time 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 197 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Advanced Cue Storing and Modifying Black Out 198 How Faders Affect Intensity Previously intensity states were discussed in relation to cue store operations refer to Intensity States on page 110 In addition to these four intensity states the Grand Master fader Black Out feature and submasters faders can a
26. SH d QA l
27. VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 108 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic QUES CUE CONCEPTS 6 Cue Concepts What Is a Cue A cue stores a predefined combination of luminaire parameters such as focus color beam timing etc which will be recalled when the cue is played back in a submaster By playing back a series of cues a show can be created Cues are stored with numbers which enable random access for modification or playback at any time The Virtuoso console can store up to 10 000 cues numbered from 01 to 9999 99 Cues can also be given alpha numeric labels for identification The cue store process is basically a what you see is what you get operation based on the intensity state of the luminaire In other words the parameter values corresponding to the stage look are the values stored in the cue when a store operation takes place Which parameters are stored is determined by the current intensity state of each luminaire and the filter settings 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 109 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Creating Cues Intensity States One of the most important factors to consider during both cue storing and playback is the intensity state and intensity level of selected channels at the time of the store operation During store operations the intensity state will determine which parameters will store data and for the intensity parameter itself
28. and enter required value For example Sneak 4 5 Press Enter Step 4 At touch screen or window select next parameter and enter its value using keypad Step 5 When complete press Sneak Enter Selected luminaires will move to their new instructions using their current timing values if Manual Timing is enabled Perform a sneak action using new timing information Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At touch screen or window select Sneak mode Select parameter s to be involved in transition For example Pan Step 3 At keypad press Sneak and enter required value For example Sneak 4 5 Press Enter Step 4 Using Time button enter new timing information For example Sneak Time 2 0 Step 5 At touch screen or window select next parameter and enter its value and timing information using keypad Step 6 When complete press Sneak Enter Selected luminaires will move to their new instructions using their new timing values Sneak to a preset Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At touch screen or window select Sneak mode Select parameter s to be involved in transition For example Pan Step 3 At keypad press Sneak Preset x Enter where x is the discrete preset number or press Sneak Preset Select Button Step 4 Press Sneak Enter Selected luminaires will move as dictated by prese
29. button will flash indicating that the record function is enabled Pressing Bd Cue Rec after this will disable the record function in the event you need to abort the action Note Command line shortcuts can be used when storing board cues just as with standard cues Refer to Command Line Shortcuts on page 200 Record a board cue When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Step 1 Press Store Board Cue Enter Step 2 Enter sequence of playback actions as required Step 3 Press Store Board Cue n Enter or Store Board Cue n Label Enter xxxxxx return where n is a discrete board cue number Board Cue Go button will light 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 185 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Record a board cue with a linked attribute Board cues can be linked to other board cues macros or snapshots Step 1 Press Store Board Cue Enter Step 2 Enter sequence of playback actions as required Step 3 Press Store Board Cue m Link Board Cue n Enter where m and n are discrete board cue numbers Substitute Macro or Snap Shot in place of Board Cue as required Record a board cue with a wait time Step 1 Press Store Board Cue Enter Step 2 Enter sequence of playback actions as required Step 3 Press Store Board Cue n Wait x Enter where n is a discrete board c
30. discrete number associated with it When applied from the console VARI LITE luminaires capable of achieving that color would assume the color whether their color mechanism is a filter wheel crossfadeable plates or rotating filters Some DMX luminaires have been added to the VARI LITE color system This system allows consistent color matching across all types of luminaires The VARIXLITE Color System window is a logical listing of color names and gel numbers that can be selected and displayed from selected luminaires The listing contains the color name VARI LITE ID number and gel number equivalent which is used throughout the lighting industry Refer to VARI LITE Color System Charts on page 98 for a complete listing of VARIXLITE colors and their equivalents 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 95 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Applying VARIXLITE Colors From VL Color System Window Using the VARIXLITE Color System window you can select a specific color either by its VARI LITE color name or number or by gel number and have all luminaires able to achieve that color go to that color When colors are sent luminaires able to achieve the color will do so Luminaires unable to achieve the color will go to black except for VL6 luminaires which go to white The window uses the following graphics to indicate luminaire compatibility with any given color e A black filled circle indicates that the luminaire can match the color
31. from which every object in your 3D graphic has been located By defining all three locations you can achieve an accurate representation of your production in the Graphic Display window e A left right from origin e Y forward backward from origin e Z height from origin Define 3D settings Step 1 Open Luminaire Patch window by dropping a new luminaire icon into Plan View window or by double clicking an existing icon Refer to Patching VARIXLITE Luminaires on page 32 Step 2 Enter an X Y and Z value Ba K Point of Origin i SS Note The Z coordinate height sets the top position for the luminaire s hook in the 3D graphic For example to place a luminaire on a pipe at a height of 20 0 to the bottom of the pipe the luminaire should be placed at 20 2 for accurate placement eege Ab Spiti pen KS eege i H ae a CU Chen E Dirai TT 1E Larp Control 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 Define 3D settings for X Y and Z location 259 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Changing 3D Height Location An easy method of changing the height Z coordinate of an object in the 3D environment is accomplished at the Plan View window Height can be adjusted in two ways e By an absolute setting For example all luminaires are raised to an absolute height of 10 feet e Onarelative basis For example all luminaires are raised two feet from their current height regardless whe
32. naire s intensity down time When a cue is recalled a zero luminaire will fade out with the luminaire s intensity down time It will not change any other parameter positions because there is no data stored for them 12 April 01 319 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 320 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A APPENDIX G Technical Specifications Weight Dimensions Weight Includes console Macintosh G4 computer and 15 monitor 106 5 lbs 48 3 kg Dimensions 44 x 24 x 8 in 112 x 61 x 21 cm Power Requirements Console 2 0 A at 120 V 50 60 Hz 1 0 A at 240 V 50 60 Hz Macintosh G4 computer and 15 monitor 8 0 A at 120 V 50 60 Hz 4 5 A at 240 V 50 60 Hz 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 321 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL System Capacity Control of 2 000 multiple parameter luminaires 2 000 10 000 cues per fixture luminaire dependent 1 000 presets 1 000 effects 100 beam selects 300 color selects 1000 group selects 1 000 board cues 1 000 macros 1 200 snapshots 30 submasters in 3 pages 26 DMX universes Interface Support 8 DMX universes Copper and fiber optic Ethernet connections for Virtuoso protocol SMPTE Time Code input MIDI Time Code input MIDI Notes input External Trigger switch closure for Board Cue Go Optional Equipment Support Up to three additional monitors Channel Select Panel USB printer 322 12 April 01 02 9668 00
33. refer to Importing a Venue on page 256 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 273 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 274 Console Log A console log containing information such as calibration failure detections programming data cue repair summaries and save reports is available for each console Messages posted in the console s Log Message box are the same messages collected in this log Log Messages Console 1 On Line Setup _ system Conti RETA IT TA 3D Location Note The log has a limit of 1Mb After it is full messages will no longer be logged although they will still appear in the information bar as they occur Press Clear to empty log so that new messages will be displayed Using Log window At Setup menu select Log e Click check boxes to display desired information e Press Clear to clear all messages Specifies which types of information will be displayed EA Errors EA Coalo A Hess ey Debug ier 1240531 25930PH Conai Sia Denied Trio 1 7 A0 17 20 2730 00 4750 57 20 77 60 TEN F FIGA TE RA DPTO EA DO DE FAA OA TR TE 1210591 Pr Deech Site Denia Turis 1 10 17 20 27 30 377 40 47 50 57 701 77 40 APTA 130 145 156 200 25 207 20 200 2235 2354 260 272 779 754 361 559 Tid TH 785 757 12410591 204 Commi Stave fake Thuvbe 1 10 17 20 27 30 80 ATH 0 TS Era BE FT A 130149 126 200 Se 260 772 ZE 361 250 570 588 708 725 LSA SPA Coat Sine Dni Tarte 17 510 7 20
34. 01 139 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Templates The template section of the window provides 20 programmable templates which can be used with the Timing Filter and Sneak modes to store your most used settings When in Timing Mode the templates are for time settings when in Filter Mode the templates are for filter settings etc Select tab to change window mode Displays template name Template operations Filter grid gt F TIMING FILTER DY NAMIC SNE A y T Templates O S A STORE LABEL CLEAR ALL Timing entry Parameter selected when lit Selects entire CINTEN rocus couor pram EDGE coro ff column of parameters In addition to the template access buttons in the window the first six templates associated with each mode can be accessed using the six buttons to the right of the touch screen on the console Access first six templates a AAA 2 EPA PEA sans T E Els eree E Up E Cc s ITF JE O _ CIS INTEN FOCUS COLOR BEAM EDGE GOBO ENTER E A gt i SE vi Clear All OOOO N a ES 7N N IA A y J K C p
35. 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES ADVANCED CUE STORING AND MODIFYING 11 Submaster Faders Submaster faders can affect the intensity output of selected luminaires prior to the Grand Master contribution provided the submaster is currently selected Calculation of the final intensity output when including submaster faders becomes more complex A way to visualize the impact of encoder fader settings on intensity is to open the Luminaire Status window and view the resulting level changes as you move each fader As with the two examples given on the previous page these instructions are intended to help show the relationship of intensity controls since it would be impossible to provide examples for all possible combinations 1 2 3 Step Step Step Step Step 4 At Operation menu select Luminaire Status Select luminaires Using Intensity encoder or Full button bring intensity levels to 100 Select a submaster by pressing its Select button Cue Short Pard Cue Seet Pan view MiGraphic laminaire Pata A lite naty Ei Snapshot Aier Time aia Wl Color trini 5 Move Intensity encoder submaster fader and Grand Master fader in various combinations and view the intensity level changes in Luminaire Status window s Intensity column This will give you an idea of how these faders and encoders work together to calculate a final intensity level for the selected luminaires This is important because c
36. 2 Y min max Encoder 3 Z min max Dynamic States Dynamic states can be controlled by the soft encoders when Dyn is selected These knobs can then be used to adjust the parameters of dynamic states as defined by the Dynamic State feature available on the touch screen display Note This is an advanced feature and will be discussed in Dynamic State Mode on page 150 The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 ORIENT min max Encoder 2 SIZE min max Encoder 3 RATE min max 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 53 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Frame VL7B Luminaire Only Framing beam shaping can be controlled by the soft encoders when Frame is selected These knobs can be used to access the framing parameters of the luminaire s beam Note Buttons A and B can be selected individually or together When selected the letter will illuminate in the display The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 SHUTTER 1 Button a selects Encoder 1 for control of first motor Button b selects Encoder 1 for control of second motor Encoder 2 SHUTTER 2 Button a selects Encoder 2 for control of first motor Button b selects Encoder 2 for control of second motor Encoder 3 SHUTTER 3 Button a selects Encoder 3 for control of first motor Button b selects Encoder 3 for control of second motor Encoder 4 SHUTTER 4 Button a selects Encoder 4 for control of first motor
37. 2 Lp Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 B State Action 3 Part 3 Part 2 Part 1 none L Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 rei State Action 4 Part 4 Part 3 Part 2 Part 1 L Step 1 Step 2 Li Step 3 B State Action 5 L Etc For example purposes actions are not necessarily complete sequences An action merely represents what happens at each stage of the effect whether it is a complete sequence or a portion of a sequence effect Once a part reaches the last step it automatically goes back to the first step g e Continuous Cont Once started all parts are in some step at all times during the and repeats sequence Refer to example on next page D e Cycle The effect runs all set parts through the first sequence step then each set part through the second sequence step etc 120 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS EFFECTS CONCEPTS 7 Start Start determines how the sequence steps enter the effect e e Simultaneous Simul All set parts assume some effect state upon effect recall either a discrete instruction or the background state e e Cascade Casc The set parts will start the sequence in a staggered entry Part 1 will complete Step 1 then go to Step 2 while Part 2 begins Step 1 etc Continuous Simultaneous Effect
38. 2 VARIXLITE Color System for DMX Fixtures VL Similar Color Name No To CYB SSZ PAL Pink Tint 101 Lux 55 Match Match Match Bastard Amber 103 Lux 02 Match Match Match GAM Bastard Amber 104 GAM 325 Match Warm Bastard Amber 105 Lee 162 Match Match Match Pale Golden Amber 107 Lux 09 Match Match Match Light Amber 110 Lux 16 Match Match Almost Lee 204 Light Flame 112 Lux 17 Match Match Match Medium Bastard 115 Lux 04 Match Match Match Amber Dark Bastard Amber 116 Lux 03 Match Match Match Warm Amber 122 Lee 176 Match Match Match Lux 01 Peach 125 GAM 320 Match Match Match Flesh Pink 131 Lux 34 Almost Almost Match Dark Pink 134 Lee 111 Match Match Match Medium Salmon 136 Lux 32 Match Match Match Salmon 138 Lux 41 Match Match Match Brite Pink 141 Lee 128 Match Match Match Dark Peach 145 Match Match Match Lee Magenta 149 Lee 113 Match Match Dark Salmon 151 Match Match Deep Salmon 155 Almost Dark Red 161 Medium Red 164 Lux 27 Primary Red 168 Lee 106 Dark Orange 173 Lux 26 Light Red 177 GAM 235 Almost Dark Orange 181 Match Orange 183 Lux 19 Match Match Lee 164 Medium Amber 187 Lux 22 Match Almost Match Deep Golden Amber 201 GAM 345 Almost Match Match Canary 205 Lux 21 Match Match Match Light Amber 208 Match Match Match Lee Orange 212 Lee 105 Match Almost Match 102 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM VARI L
39. 3D Height Location on page 260 e Delete icons using the alpha keyboard Align Tools Available when multiple icons are selected Selection Tool Use to select move Displays fixture information when and open information window for icons pointer is placed over an icon Note Selections made in the Plan View window while editing is Enabled will not be reflected at Channel Select window or optional Channel Select panel 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 35 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL With Patch Editing Disabled e Use View Select pop up menu to view status data based on channel thumbwheel or any other parameter data as required For example selecting Pan would display the pan coordinate for each luminaire e Select icons by clicking on them Select multiple icons by dragging a box around them or by holding down s button while selecting e Selected icons channels in the Plan View window while editing is Disabled will also be selected for manual control at the Channel Select panel Refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 Click in an open space to deselect all icons View Select Selected icons channels will be Pop Up Menu reflected on the Channel Select panel Patch The Patch window displays patch information in a spreadsheet format Data can be viewed at any time and edited when patch editing is enabled e At Setup menu select Patch Window will open e View and or edit information as requ
40. 4 E 4 e Invert deselects currently selected channels and selects all other patched channels e Clear clears all channel selections e All selects all patched channels e Active selects all channels with active luminaires e Mark selects all marked channels e Zero selects all channels in a zero state For a more in depth explanation refer to Intensity States on page 110 Next and Last The Next and Last buttons located on the Manual Control panel will step through all on line channels Next increments the channel selection by one If a single channel were selected either with the keypad or the 100 button array pressing Next will increment the channel selection by one If a range of channels is selected the first press of Next will select the first channel in that range Subsequent presses will increment the channel selection by one but will not select a channel outside the range Last decrements channel selection by one If a single channel were selected either with the keypad or the 100 button array pressing Last will decrement the channel selection by one If a range of channels is selected the first press of Last will select the last channel in that range Subsequent presses will decrement the channel selection by one but will not select a channel outside the range Next Last pressing these buttons together will reselect the original chan
41. 72 Store The Store function allows you to save your own parameter settings into a select for recall at any time in the future Step 1 At popup menu select function you wish to access Group Color Beam etc Step 2 At Bank popup menu select required bank Step 3 Click required Page button Step 4 Click STORE Step 5 Click Select Button where you wish to store data For example select 10 Label The Label function allows you to label individual selects When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Step 1 Click LABEL Step 2 Click Select Button where you wish to store data Step 3 Atcomputer keyboard type label use Tab to move among lines of text and press return Update The Update function allows you to update the data which was originally stored in the select The label will be retained so that you will not have to re enter it after an update Step 1 At popup menu select function you wish to access Group Color Beam etc Step 2 At Bank popup menu select required bank Step 3 Click required Page button Step 4 Click UPDATE Step 5 Click Select Button of select you wish to update Data will be updated according to new settings Note Operation buttons only apply to the select display directly above the buttons 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS GENERAL OPERATION A Delete The Delete f
42. A luminaire that is zero will only store intensity data which is stored as a hard zero 0 level along with the luminaire s intensity down time When a cue is recalled a zero luminaire will fade out with the luminaire s intensity down time It will not change any other parameter positions because there is no data stored for them e Out inactive no parameter data 0 level When a luminaire is out it will not store any parameter data When a cue is recalled an out or inactive luminaire will not change parameter positions but if previously active it will fade out in the cue s out time 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A BASIC QUES CREATING CUES 6 Setting Intensity States Note Although VLM moving mirrors do not have lamps they must still have an intensity value active marked or zero in order to store information in a cue The intensity state can be set by the Intensity encoder or the Intensity State buttons located at the manual control panel Intensity State Buttons Applies an intensity state to a selected luminaire s Intensity Encoder Adjusts intensity level for a selected luminaire s The keypad At and Full commands can also be used to set intensity using a percentage value of 0 100 The At button is used to enter intensity values e lt Chan gt n At m Enter changes the intensity level of the sel
43. Ara yaa ira Delete icon button as required W Delete will require a confirmation Les Backup Show File to Disk Any show file resident on the console s hard drive can be copied to a Zip disk for back up or storage Step 1 At File menu select Show File Manager Step 2 At left column select show file to be copied Step 3 At right column select required disk and folder Click right arrow button to copy file 270 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE DATA MANAGEMENT 16 Import Show Data Data can be imported from one show file to another To import show data Step 1 Open a show file to import data into At File menu select Show File Manager Save A Copy Impert 30 Ber kaurnurg Eitor Sigri New Mrmer linpart Neng Step 2 Step 3 Select required show file to import from 4 Step 4 Click Import icon Import Show Data window will Sg open Import Modules linpect Prafiles Wadabe Frofies Step 5 Select data you wish to import by clicking boxes Click OK impert From Show File Y O Options O Bean Palette O Macros O Presets O Patch O Entry Template O ect Om O Sets O Snapshots O Sequences O Board Cies O troaps O miti Timecode O Calor Palette A Farm Deiaupts O cues S ll Coes All channels selected Cannes Cues To a 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 271 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Save A Copy A copy of your show file can be sav
44. C G Caw ew O e Snapshots on page 173 Effects e Macros on page 178 E Macros 92 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 5 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE Color System This chapter provides instructions for applying VARI LITE system colors to both VARI LITE and DMX controllable luminaires e Color Control e Applying VARIXLITE Colors e VARIXLITE Color System Charts 12 April 01 93 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 94 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM COLOR CONTROL 5 Color Control Overview As mentioned in the previous chapter color can be controlled by the encoders Color Select Display and the keypad In addition the Vari Lite Color System window is available for applying colors from the VARI LITE Color System to the luminaires This window operates independently from the colors that may be available in the Color Selects giving you another way to quickly apply colors VARIXLITE Colors The VARI LITE Color System is a unique system of colors each of which has a
45. Cape ba Color E Gabo Wheel Le Gebo Index HA Gebe otata Mascpllang a O Miscellamecus O Miscellaneous 3 J Mistellameous I ki zced O speed 1 O Mpeod 3 O Mipecd 3 Quiti fel wes ce ea 127 12 a 1 Click OK to return to data window Use Quick Set buttons to configure window for a certain type of luminaire 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 61 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 62 Intensity Window The Intensity window can be used to view intensity values for all Cue Sheri patched channels Selections made at the Channel Select Beard Que Seek window or panel and or command line keypad are highlighted in igual Gi the window and subsequent changes to intensity values are Laminaire Mates NS reflected in the display Snapshot Famer Time reie WL Color tyin e At Operation menu select Intensity Using manual controls change intensity values as required Changes will be reflected in display Note Command I opens multiple copies of the Intensity window Intensity 104 105 107 123 143 Color Coding Color coding of the intensity values provides useful information regarding how the channels are changing from cue to cue and if an intensity level comes from manual control or an effect The coloring of channel numbers and intensity values provide the following indications e Selected channels are displayed in orange e While increasing intens
46. Causes timing data to BE Disa E H EH CH ese settings into a be ignored in a submaster submaster for fader control Black p Choosi Choos Choosi Choos Choosi Choos Choos Choosi pron Choose CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT CT 4 Grand Master 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Takes all ae intensity levels to zero Applies a submaster mode when pressed along with a mode Filter Grid button IFE Ai C B G Rate Value i A Grand Master Fader A A Modes
47. Disable Fine The Time Disable feature causes timing data to be ignored for any cues that are activated on that submaster while it is in timing disable mode Apply Timing Disable to a submaster e Press Time Dsbl along with Choose button for required submaster Release Timing Disable mode e Press Clear along with Choose button of associated submaster to clear submaster of all modes 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 233 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Ind Man Assign 234 Independent The Independent feature prohibits a specific submaster from having its content modified by any other submaster although it can still be modified manually or by the Grand Master Blackout fader Example If a channel is controlled by Submaster 1 and intensity control is subsequently assumed by Submaster 2 and Submaster 2 is independent that intensity value is now independent and cannot be affected by any changes to Submaster 1 s fader setting Make a submaster independent e Press Ind along with Choose button for required submaster Release independent mode This action will not modify the output of the submaster only enable those channels parameters to be available for control by other playbacks e Press Clear along with Choose of associated submaster to clear submaster of all modes Manual Assign The Manual Assign feature loads any selected channels and their current parameter settings into the submaster
48. Edge de ES RR 178 Recording Macros puta A ds 179 Using Record Button A REENEN EENS 179 Prom Keypad WEE 180 From Encoders Window c c ccccccssssssceeesecessessnseeeccecsessaecececesesesseaeeeeesesensaeees 180 Macros Data WI O Wii tt A E a tao 181 Recalling Macros cine sie gdege SS EE AE EAR EE geg 183 Board Cues EE EE 184 Recording Board Ces 20200 a A ee Re 185 Using Record Bultaco Pe ene pad AE 185 Prom Keypadis ia alias 185 From Encoders Wimpdow 186 Deleting Board Cuesta ideada 186 Recalling Board Cues iia tdt dhe ales ie eben 187 Board Cues Windows eege Set SE EES ENEE AAA Sg iria IER Chapter 11 Advanced Cue Features Special Cue Attributes OVA AA A A eR a Dk 193 Er ON 194 LOOP An E 195 AAA A NN 196 DUE TIM Gade ees A A e o es 197 Advanced Cue Storing and Modifying How Faders Affect Intensity conconnccnncnnocononcnonanoncnnnononcnnncnnnanononn conan crono nn nannncnnnnnnnoos 198 Grand Master Black Out 198 Submaster Fade ci cs 199 Command Line Shortcuts ennienni eaaa l oeat te iA AE EE R aS 200 Using witht Store EE 200 Store Store esc a cece Yee See Ee es 200 Submaster Load EE 200 Cue Store Target egen O A 201 Cue Attribute Larreta tea 201 Miscellaneous ot aiii 201 Creating Cue Numbers without Storing Data 201 Locatine Stored CUES ueno dolida ici 202 WW PO ates toda A A ithe e a IA de te 203 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xix VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Kier 204 Selec
49. Freeze Function Filter Channel Filter Dynamic Disable Time Disable Independent and Manual Assign can be used for advanced control of events during playback or to assign control of specific channels to a submaster When Function Filter Channel Filter Dynamic Disable Time Disable and Independent modes are assigned the mode indicator in the submaster display will light accordingly I FIE CIBIG rate 100 F CD 1 B 52 Corresponding mod Blwash indicator lights when a mode is applied Rdwash 01 To release a submaster from a specific mode press function button for example Dyn Dsbl along with the Choose button for the required submaster The functions are toggled on and off using this method Note It is possible to set up all submaster modes without having the submaster selected except Manual Assign 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 229 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Clear The Clear button releases a submaster from any applied modes and clears any active or pending cues returning the submaster to its default state The clear feature is a 2 step process so that mode setting and cue information can be cleared separately Clear Choose clear this information Clear double click Choose clears this _ z information Y L Blwash S i Rdwash Clear modes f
50. GAM 847 Almost Almost Polycolor 70 N C Blue 313 GAM 840 Almost Match GAM 980 Slate Blue 318 Lee 161 Almost Match Match Pale Blue 321 Lux 69 Match Match 12 April 01 103 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 104 Table 5 2 VARIXLITE Color System for DMX Fixtures Continued VL Similar Color Name No To CYB SSZ PAL Lee Light Blue 325 Lee 118 Match Match Match Bright Blue 330 Lee 141 Match Match Medium Blue 342 Lee 132 Match Almost Match Sea Blue 345 Lux 68 Match Almost Almost GAM 810 Icy Blue 350 Match Match Match Just Blue 355 Lee 79 Match Match Primary Blue 359 Lux 83 Match Match Almost GAM 850 Dark Steel Blue 365 Deep Blue 371 Dark Blue 374 Lee 120 Royal Blue 380 GAM 905 Dark UV 401 Indigo 403 Lux 59 Match Congo Blue 406 Lee 181 Darkest Lavender 409 Match Dark Rose Purple 411 Match Match Match Deep Lavender 415 Almost Match Match Cool Lavender 422 GAM 845 Almost Match Match Lilac 418 Almost Match Match Special Dark Lavender 421 Match Match Match Pale Lavender 425 Almost Match Match Mercury Vapor 429 Almost Almost Match Medium Violet 433 Lux 359 Match Match Match Dark Lavender 443 Lee 180 Match Match Almost Lee Special Lavender 447 Lee 137 Match Match Almost Twilight 451 GAM 915 Almost Match Match Deep Lavender 455 GAM 948 Match Match Match Pale Lilac 461 Almost Match Match Pe
51. Green 267 Match Almost Almost Almost Match Match Kelly Green 268 Lux 94 Almost Match Match Match Dark Green 270 Lee 124 Match Almost Match Match Fluorescent 273 Match Almost Match Match Match Green Dark 275 Almost Match Match Match Match Fluorescent Green Blue Grass 281 GAM 690 Almost Match Match Match 680 Match Green GAM 440 Medium Blue 284 Lee 116 Almost Almost Match Match Match Match Green Dark Peacock 286 Almost Match Match Match Match Green Peacock Green 287 Lee 115 Almost Match Match Match Dark Turquoise 289 Match Match Match Match Light Aqua 291 Match Almost Match Match Almost Match Aqua 295 Match Match Match Match Rosco Peacock 298 Lux 73 Almost Match Match Blue 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 99 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Table 5 1 VARIXLITE Color System for VARIXLITE Luminaires Continued Color Name VL Similar VL6 VL7 No To VL2C VL4 VL5 VL5A VL5B VL6B VL7B Lee Steel Blue 299 Lee 117 Almost Match Match 1 4 CTB 301 Lee 203 Match Match Match Almost 1 2 CTB 303 Lee 202 Match Match Match Almost Lux 61 Full CTB 307 Lee 201 Match Almost Almost Almost 810 Match City Blue 310 GAM 847 Almost Match Match 830 Match Polycolor 70 N C Blue 313 GAM 840 Match Almost 840 Match GAM 980 Slate Blue 318 Lee 161 Almost Match Pale Blue 321 Lux 69 Match Almost Match Match Lee
52. Light Blue 325 Lee 118 Almost Match Match Bright Blue 330 Lee 141 Almost Match Almost Match Match Almost Medium Blue 342 Lee 132 Match Almost Match Almost Match Match Sea Blue 345 Lux 68 Match Match Almost Almost Almost 805 Match GAM 810 Icy Blue 350 Match Match Match Match Match Match Just Blue 355 Lee 79 Almost Almost Almost Match Primary Blue 359 Lux 83 Match Almost Match Almost 865 Match GAM 850 Dark Steel Blue 365 Match Almost Match Deep Blue 371 Match Almost Almost Match Match Dark Blue 374 Lee 120 Match Match Almost Match Match Match Royal Blue 380 GAM 905 Almost Match Match Match 880 Match Dark UV 401 Match Almost Almost Match Indigo 403 Lux 59 Match Match Match Almost Match Congo Blue 406 Lee 181 Match Match Match Match Match Match Darkest 409 Match Match Match Match Match Lavender Dark Rose 411 Match Match Match Match Match Purple Deep Lavender 415 Match Match Almost Match Match Lilac 418 Match Almost Match Match Almost Special Dark 421 Match Match Match Match Match Lavender Cool Lavender 422 GAM 845 Match Almost Match Almost 845 Match Pale Lavender 425 Match Match Match Mercury Vapor 429 Match Match Match Match Medium Violet 433 Lux 359 Match Almost Match Almost 970 Match Dark Lavender 443 Lee 180 Match Almost Match Almost Match 980 Match Lee Special 447 Lee 137 Match Almost Match Match Match Lavender Twilight 451 GAM 915 Match Almost 930 Match Deep Lavender 455 GAM 948 Match Match Match Match Match Match Match Pale Lilac 461
53. Match Almost Match Match Match Match 100 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM CHARTS 5 Table 5 1 VARIXLITE Color System for VARIXLITE Luminaires Continued Color Name VL Similar VL6 VL7 No To VL2C VL4 VL5 VL5A VL5B VL6B VL7B Periwinkle 463 GAM 960 Match Match Match Match Match Match Match GAM 970 Dusty Lavender 466 Match Match Almost Match Almost Match No Color Lilac 468 Lux 52 Match Match Match Match Match Special 469 Lux 54 Match Match Match Match Lavender Dark Rose 471 Match Match Almost Match Match Dark Fushia 474 Lux 358 Almost Match Match Almost 985 Match Dark Follies Pink 476 Almost Match Match Almost Match Magenta 478 Lee 126 Almost Match Match Match Match Hot Pink 480 Almost Match Match Match Mauve 483 Almost Match Match Match Follies Pink 489 Almost Match Match Almost Flesh Pink 491 Match Match Match Match Match Rose Purple 492 Lux 48 Match Match Match 080 Match Carnation 494 Match Almost Almost Match No Color Pink 495 Match Match Almost Match Match Cool Bastard 496 Lux 52 Almost Match Almost Almost Match Match Amber Lux 33 Dusty Rose 497 Almost Match Almost Match Match Rouge 498 Almost Match Match Match Match Match 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 101 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL VL Color System for DMX Controllable Fixtures Table 5
54. Plan View window and Patch menu selection will change to Disable Editing Save Editing option Save Lan will also be activated Inpert ARRE Displays as 2D or 3D Zoom Control configuration in window Total Channels Select Object Icon Bar Grid line Use pop up menu to select zoom in or out percent based on Grid Spacing Refer to 2D 3D Mode Guidelines on page 37 for more information Tip gt You can periodically save editing changes to the Plan View without disabling editing by selecting Save Editing at the Patch menu 26 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH 2 Step 3 If required define plan view drawing size a At2D Display menu select Drawing Size Drawing Size window will open b Enter size scale and point of origin X Y coordinate for drawing refer to Match 3D on page 258 for instructions on using this feature The default unit of measure is English To configure console for Metric units e SEH refer to Settings Window on page 245 el c Click Ok A a e tapas Step 4 If required define grid size spacing between Lea LS grids a At2D Display menu select Grid Size Grid Spacing window will open b Enter grid spacing and select inches or feet at pop up menu The default unit of measure is English To configure console for Metric units refer to Settings Window on page 245 c Click Ok d At 2D Display menu enable or disable
55. Press Stop Step to stop a running effect Step 2 Press Stop Step repeatedly to step through effect Step 3 Press Run to resume playback Submaster Display The submaster display indicates the effects attributes as they play back IIFIE C BIG rate 100 e5 Active Effect Colors e ES Tilt T 1 Q 1 S STP 1 Status R running S stopped 136 12 April 01 Sequence Step 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 8 Timing Filter Displays This chapter provides instructions for using the timing and filter displays which will give you expanded control over the console s store and playback functions e Overview e Timing Mode e Filter Mode e Dynamic State Mode e Sneak Mode e Templates 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 138 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS OVERVIEW 3 Overview Ref Timing Filter Features Another way to expand your control of console operations is by using the timing filter features These features which also include dynamic state and sneak controls can be used alone or in conjunction with the command line keypad to apply parameter timing values and filters during store and playback operations and to manually control luminaires The timing filter feature has four modes e Timing Mode used to apply timing delay and speed values to any and all combinations of para
56. Snap To Grid option enabled when checked Step 5 Display luminaire icons in a two dimensional or three dimensional location mode by clicking on either 2D or 3D Refer to 2D 3D Mode Guidelines on page 37 for important information regarding this feature Plan View Background Picture A 2D background picture can be imported for use in the Plan View window The console will accept the following 1 1 format files e dx e dwg Sheh Fila Pio Save A Copy To import Plan View background picture e At File menu select Import 2D Background 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 27 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 28 Patching DMX Conventional Fixtures The console provides for a maximum of 26 universes labeled A thru Z which are assigned to DMX buses or hosts hardware outputs within the system This means that the actual amount of buses available will depend on your system setup The Virtuoso DX console contains two DMX cards each supporting four universes Other VARIXLITE interfaces which include DMX buses are the UDM unit one bus and the NIF unit two buses These buses and their starting thumbwheel addresses can be configured using the DMX Setup window To define DMX universes Step 1 If necessary at Patch menu select Enable Editing Must be enabled to edit window Step 2 At Patch menu select DMX Setup DMX Setup window ete will open Export Fateh Man View K Patos SI Whocat
57. Snapshot and Effect select functions Three separate select displays are visible in the window at any one time Each display s popup menu allows selection of Presets Beams Colors Groups Macros Snapshots and Effects which correspond to the select displays available on the console desk refer to Panel Select Displays on page 68 Within each select display there are banks and pages which provide access to the total amount of selects available with any particular display e At Panels menu choose Select Displays to open window Select Popup Menu Selects Presets Beams Colors Groups a Macros Snapshots or Effects Tening Display Page Buttons headers Collapse Button Shows or hides select display Bank Popup Menu Select Button Select Mode Button Places window in select mode Operation Buttons Operation will be applied to currently active select Parameters channel selections and events can be stored into the selects by using the controls provided in the window or the command line keypad Individual selects can be labeled stored modified and recalled as required SELECT STORE LABEL UPDATE DELETE The display can be placed in one of several modes When a select is chosen it will respond according to the currently selected mode e Select e Store e Label e Update e Delete 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 71 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 10 Label
58. Step 3 At window select area to be snapshot and or click on arrow to drop down submasters window and select any required submasters to be snapshot Step 4 At a manual control select display press Bank Function Snaps Step 5 Press Store Snapshot Select Button Indicates that Snapshots have been selected SNAPSHOTS Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 10 20 Label a snapshot When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard e Label Snap Shot n xxxxxx return or e Label Snapshot Select Button xxxxxx return Link snapshot to a cue using shortcut method A shortcut for linking a snapshot to a cue is available In this case the current desk settings are stored into the snapshot according to the filters currently enabled in the Snapshot Filter window and automatically linked to the cue The snapshot stored using this method is given a snapshot number of 200 above The number is chosen by the console and cannot be accessed in the Snapshot Data window Step 1 At Snapshot Filter widow ensure required areas of the console to be snapshot are enabled Step 2 Configure console as required Step 3 Press Cue n Link Snap Shot Snap Shot Snapshot will be stored as a number above 200 and linked to the cue Note Each snapshot created this way will be unique to that cue Commonly used snapshot
59. Step 3 Enter parameter value Step 4 Click OK Select F10 Step 1 Press F10 Step 2 Select item Step 3 Enter item number Step 4 Click OK Time F11 Step 1 Select a parameter s Step 2 Press F11 Enter value 1 2 Step 3 Select Time Speed or Delay Step 4 5 Step 5 Click OK 12 April 01 A z Value Cos tu Let Value iw D Preset D faam D ier D nme O ipri 02 9668 0001A SPECIAL FEATURES FUNCTION KEYS 9 Undo F12 Step 1 Press F12 Step 2 Click OK to undo last action Quick Keys The following computer keyboard quick keys can be used as shortcuts to select options in the function windows F1 F12 For example while in the Time window pressing T would select Time S would select Speed and D would select Delay B Beam M Macro C Cue O Board Cue D Delay P Preset E Effect Q Sequence F Full S Snapshot or Speed G Group T Time or Set H Channel U Cue with Preset K Color V Value or VL Color and Cy Plus The following quick keys can be used with the 3D Graphic window to adjust the camera angle 4 6 left right direction also arrow keys 8 2 up down also arrow keys 7 9 zoom in zoom out also E 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 169 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL The following quick keys can be used with the Select Displays window option enables the S
60. Vemi impart Venue Step 3 At File menu select Update Profiles Profiles will be SES compared If any are significantly different a warning Geen eat window will appear Click Update to replace old dat Profile version of Profile this will destroy show data in some A cases If you choose not to update click Don t Print Update Step 4 Restart NIF and or UDM units as required AENA ee et sti de la bor ded girra Sees ee KE Klee 278 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE ON LINE DIAGNOSTICS 16 On Line Diagnostics 02 9668 0001A DMX Channel Tests The DMX Diagnostics available in the DMX Setup window can be used to troubleshoot DMX patch problems The diagnostic function allows you to send values directly to a specific DMX channel bypassing all other console controls Perform DMX Diagnostics Step 1 At Patch or Setup menu select DMX Setup DMX Setup window will open Tarn Patch DR Ennble Editing Step 2 To see channel assignment for a DMX universe use cursor aha to select universe A thru Z Channel assignments associated with that universe will appear in DMX Channel Assignment grid import Pach Export Pato Man View EE Pato ET Miocaban Step 3 To test a specific channel at DMX Diagnostics section of window enter channel number in Channel field and a value for example 100 in Value field Click Send to send value directly to channel Watch for appropriate response in
61. Y J Ne p ko Y A MAIN Note Refer to Templates on page 156 for complete instructions on templates 140 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS TIMING MODE 3 Timing Mode Overview Timing is used to control the duration delay and speed of parameter transitions For example the timing features can be used to define how fast a luminaire will pan from one position to another and how long it will take for its intensity to fade from 0 to 100 percent Timing total transition time delay and speed values can be applied to any and all combinations of parameters within a cue Timing or speed can be entered along with a delay but not both These values can be different for each parameter of each luminaire as required For example Cue 1 contains Luminaire 1 and Luminaire 2 A different timing value can be applied to each of Luminaire 1 s parameters For instance Focus 2 00 Edge 00 30 Zoom 1 30 and Color 1 00 15 Different timing values can be applied to Luminaire 2 s parameters For instance Focus 4 00 Edge 03 30 Zoom 2 45 and Color 1 01 15 Timing Mode Button Speed 1 2 and 3 Push to display timing Used with DMX fixtures which have values in touch screen speed mapped into their profiles ER El TIMING ES FILTER DYNAM
62. You agree that any action at law or in equity arising out of the License or relating to this Software shall be resolved individually through biding arbitration using the then current rules of the American Arbitration Association in Dallas Texas and the resulting decisions may be entered in any court with proper jurisdiction This means that if you have a grievance with us you cannot take us to court and you may not join your action with any other party You can address such grievances through arbitration only and you are hereby consenting to do it in Dallas Texas using Texas laws without regard to Texas conflicts of laws You agree that are properly subject to the jurisdiction of the courts of the State of Texas and waive any rights to challenge personal jurisdiction 9 Government Licensee If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of the United States Government the following provisions apply a the Government acknowledges Vari Lite s representation that the Software and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of them is in the public domain b the Government acknowledges Vari Lite s representation that the Software is Restricted Computer Software as that term is defined in Clause 52 227 19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR and is Commercial Computer Software as that term is defined in Subpart 227 471 of the Department of Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplemen
63. a Delete command e Undo Enter reverses the last store update delete command latest str upd del Undo Modifying Cues in a Submaster Cues can also be modified and re stored while active in a submaster The Store Selective Store and Update commands can be performed by using them in combination with the submaster s Choose button Guidelines e When modifying a cue in a submaster the modified cue data is automatically loaded into the associated submaster Because the loaded cue is subject to altering by the fader setting unexpected behavior can occur when that fader setting is less than full See Unexpected Behavior below e Only channels receiving instructions from the cue being modified will be changed 206 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES ADVANCED CUE STORING AND MODIFYING 11 Store Update and Selective Store with Submasters After a cue has been loaded and played back in submaster its channels can be modified and re stored using standard cue store commands For more information refer to Update on page 203 and Selective Store on page 204 Modify a cue in a submaster Step 1 Run cue in submaster Step 2 Using manual control modify parameters as required Step 3 Press Update Choose Store or Sel Store can be used instead of Update Unexpected Behavior any selected submaster s fader is set below full This happens as a
64. a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 vii VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Sicherheitshinweise Es ist u erst wichtig ALLE Sicherheitsinformationen und hinweise in diesem Handbuch und dem beiliegenden Informationsmaterial zu lesen bevor Sie die hierin beschriebenen Produkte installieren bzw bedienen Halten Sie bei der Installation und dem Einsatz dieses Produkts alle Warnhinweise und Vorsichtsmafnahmen ein Folgende Sicherheitssymbole werden in diesem Handbuch verwendet A VORSICHT weist auf m glichen Produktschaden hin WARNUNG weist auf m gliche K rperverletzung und Lebensbedrohung hin NACHSTEHEND FINDEN SIE ALLGEMEINE HINWEISE BER SICHER HEITSVORKEHRUNGEN GEGEN FEUER UND ELEKTROSCHOCK WARNUNG HINWEISE ZUM FEUERSCHUTZ 1 Ersetzen Sie Sicherungen nur mit Sicherungen vom gleichen Typ und gleicher St rke WARNUNG HINWEISE ZUM SCHUTZ GEGEN ELEKTROSCHOCK 1 VARI LITE Konsole eignen sich ausschlie lich f r trockene Standorte Regen oder Feuchtigkeit k nnen die Konsole besch digen 2 Unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an VARIXLITEO Ger ten beginnen 3 Die Ger te sollten nur von qualifiziertem Personal gewartet werden WARNUNG HF INTERFERENZ 1 Es handelt sich um ein Produkt der Klasse A In einer Wohnumgebung kann das Produkt Hochfrequ
65. action taken will replace the selected step and editing will end 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 291 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Replace all steps from Step X on through remainder of script Step 1 Using trackpad select last good step Steps after this selection will be replaced Step 2 Click punch in icon Step 3 At desk perform new series of actions Step 4 Click Stop Record icon Insert new step s Step 1 Using trackpad select step prior to where you wish to insert new step Step 2 Click insert icon Step 3 At desk perform new action s Step 4 Click Stop Record icon 292 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A APPENDIX A Tutorial Overview The following tutorial is designed to illustrate the basic steps required to create a new show file patch some luminaires create a venue store cues effects and play them back Note There are often multiple methods for performing many of the actions covered in this tutorial However only one example is provided in order to streamline the procedures In addition most stored items can be labeled however labeling is not covered in this tutorial for the same reason The following sample files have been included in the console software for use with this tutorial e Show file identical to the one created in this tutorial for comparison e 2D and 3D drawing files for importing into the show file created in this tutorial e Patch file as
66. autofollows Choose and Clear buttons e Choose when pressed with any of the submaster mode buttons allows the submaster to be placed into one of the following modes Rate Freeze Function Filter Channel Filter Dynamic Disable Time Disable Independent and Manual Assign e Clear releases a submaster from an applied mode returning it to its default state To release a submaster from a mode press Clear along with the Choose button for the required submaster Intensity Final playback intensity is determined by following combination in order 1 Intensity value stored in the cue or effect being played back 2 Fader setting of the submaster being used to playback the event 3 Setting of the Grand Master fader or associated Black Out button 02 9668 0001A REFERENCE FOLD OUTS Restricts playback to selected channels Prohibits dynamic states from playback Prohibits a submaster from having its content modified by any other submaster Halts an event in Gage mid transaction vw J Rate Clear Bump Applies filter settings to a submaster for modification of playback Clears submaster modes and events Disables playback of macros l snapshots or autofollows linked to a cue Bumps intensity Speed up or slows down playback of an event a ad ee Freeza Loads selected Adjusts rate QS y channels and their Rate Conto current parameter
67. been activated a D indicator will appear in the command line display and any advances in the cue sequence at the submaster will automatically advance the current cue If you wish to make changes to any cue then that cue number is already in the display when you go to store the cue again after making changes To exit the mode e Press the forward or backward advance buttons at the command line display 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES CUE WINDOWS 11 Cue Windows Cue Sheet Cue sheet data can be viewed and edited in the Cue Sheet window The cue sheet displays all recorded cues in numerical sequence and provides data regarding linked events which would run during playback Link attributes such as loops auto follow types wait and trail and out times are visible Unless links are provided which will run cues out of sequence any playback sequences will observe the numerical order found in the cue sheet Access Cue Sheet Sen Step 1 At Operation menu select Cue Sheet Cue Sheet Beard Cue Sheet Ge window will open WGraphic Mi lesinalre Matos ES Step 2 Enter or edit data as required amesetger Timez cata WL Color pidan Auto Follow type wait trail or none Cue link Snapshot link Out time value Cue Number f Number of Effect link Macro link loop cycles Mac Snap Link AF cee Separator Forward Backward Buttons It is possible to move forward or backward through the cue list
68. between the console and luminaire interface devices for more than 15 seconds Emergency Action De Rothing O Fade Out Time Sets the internal a 3 Ge To Cue date time stamp Time 22133 FM Change fields as required and click Set Cue Creation De aett Out Time 0 00 limecode Configures internal clock to take over in the event of a loss of external when checked Click to reverse keypad arrow direction reversed when box is checked Sets the default Out Time to be used in cues unless a different time is specified 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 6 26 10 de Tells the console what to do upon startup Sets unit of measure for 3D location distances Martup Action Macro Units E English G Metric Pabetbe More Options Lowest Active Device O Lowest Selected Device CJ Lise Fume Filter en Cobor Store Chooses which value is stored during a Beam or Color Select store command Activates filters for Color select store operations when checked 245 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 246 Default Explanations Emergency Action Default Do nothing remain in current state This setting determines what event is to occur if communication is lost between the console and the luminaire interface devices for longer than 15 seconds This information is sent upon console start up in case of an emergency You may determine one of the following Do nothing Luminaires
69. channels to m The Full button is used to quickly set intensity to 100 e lt Chan gt n Full Enter changes the intensity level of the selected channel to 100 The and buttons can be used in combination with the At button to increment or decrement a current intensity value by a specific amount For example if the current intensity value is 50 e lt Chan gt n At 0 5 Enter increases the intensity level of the selected channel to 55 e lt Chan gt n At 0 5 Enter decreases the intensity level of the selected channel to 45 To quickly enter an intensity below full but divisible by 10 use only the first digit of the desired level for example At 5 50 Presets The keypad can be used to assign presets to selected luminaires The preset entered on the keypad corresponds to the preset saved in that particular preset select refer to Presets on page 84 Examples e lt Chan gt n Preset m Enter applies preset m to the selected channel n where m is the discrete preset number e lt Chan gt n Thru q Preset m Enter applies preset m to the selected range of channels where m is the discrete preset number 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL KEYPAD CONTROL 3 Colors The keypad can be used to assign colors to selected luminaires The color entered on the keypad corresponds to the color saved in that particular color select r
70. cues or presets Click OK 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SPECIAL FEATURES FUNCTION KEYS 9 Update F3 Step 1 Using windows modify required channels Step 2 Press F3 Update window will open Step 3 Select item for update Step 4 Enter number of item where you wish to store modified channels Selective Recall F4 Step 1 At Panels menu select Timing Display Timing window will open Step 2 Select Filter tab Step 3 Select parameters to be recalled Step 5 Select item from which data will be recalled Enter number of cue preset or channel 2 3 Step 4 Press F4 Selective Recall window will open 5 Step 6 7 Step 7 Click OK Delete ER Step 1 Press F5 Step 2 Select item to delete Step 3 Enter number of item Step 4 Click OK Autoload F6 Step 1 Press F6 Step 2 Enter number of submaster for autoloading Step 3 Select Cue or Effect Step 4 Click OK 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 167 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 168 At F7 Step 1 Select desired channel s Step 2 Press F7 Step 3 Select Full or Value Enter value 1 100 Step 4 Click OK Copy Move F8 Step 1 Press F8 Step 2 Press F8 again to toggle between Copy and Move windows Step 3 At desired window enter cue numbers for copy move Operation Step 4 Click OK Sneak F9 Step 1 Press F9 Step 2 Select parameter for sneak operation
71. emitted by a source per second in a given direction within a cone of unit solid angle Also the function of a luminaire related to the brightness of the beam as projected on a surface specified by intensity data An alpha numeric identifier which can be stored with elements such as cues effects groups macros templates and selects A cue attribute which alters the next sequential cue in the Cue Sheet The automatic activation of the linked cue is dependent on the presence of a wait or trail time Links can be made to cues effects snapshots and macros A console mode wherein all actions taken are actually executed by the luminaires in real time on stage Also see Preview Editing When a cue or effect is moved to a submaster s pending file 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Loop Luminaire State Macro Manual Assign Manual Control Override Manual Timing Mode Manual Undo Marked Mask Multi Console Mode Off Line Programming 02 9668 0001A GLOSSARY B An attribute that can be added to a cue indicating the number of times a linked sequence of cues is to execute A luminaire can be in one of four different states in a cue When the luminaire is active it has recorded data for intensity and all other parameters When marked it has no intensity data but does have other parameter data When the luminaire is zero it has intensity data at 0 but does not have other parameter data opposite of marked An inac
72. fixture Step 4 To step through channels enter starting channel in Channel field and a value Click Dimmer Check and verify response in fixture Click Dimmer Check again to check next channel channel number in Channel field will increment by one each time Step 5 Click Clear Diagnostics to set all channels back to O value ada terug Select DMX universe DMX channel assignments for selected universe Enter specific channel or starting channel Enter value Sends value to specified channel Sets all channels to 0 Steps through channels 12 April 01 279 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Error Log An error log for each device is displayed in its Device Info window To access Device Info window e At System Configuration window double click on a device s icon Refer to System Configuration Window on page 22 To clear error indicators for selected device e At Device Info window for specified device click Clear Error To clear all error indicators e At Special menu select Clear Status Errors a Thumbrebeel 316 Channel 22 Crested 1211 00 200 PH Where Parani 5300 Beteier Thom heel 315 Para 2 Error Log Clears error indicators for selected device only 280 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE OFF LINE DIAGNOSTICS 16 Off Line Diagnostics Overview Virtuoso off line diagnostics allow you to test the console hardware in order to identify faulty com
73. if an Controls overall console ES A 2 FIC Tap Many intensity level Select Select Select 52 Blwash WY Chooses Submaster ae LE LE SE banks 3 total e SAM BE Run Run Run Rdwash P Selects Pa Active Cue submaster lt Stop Stop Stop Step Step Step Shows auto for playback follow time or ai Back Back Back pe cue execution Loads selected 01 time if no auto cue or effect J follow eo Go Go Go Resumes a stopped cue sequence effect Stops or steps through a cue sequence effect Plays previous active cue effect Plays pending cue effect Stop or steps Board Control Submaster through a board cue Board Contro intensity fader Back ha Starts a board cue po 12 April 01 335 VARHEx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Timing Filter Display Quick Reference Common operations and guidelines for using Timing and Filter functions TIMING Set an entire timing scheme Step 1 At touch screen select a parameter s with hard or soft buttons Step 2 At keypad press Time Delay or Speed as required followed by time value Time value will appear in cells of selected parameters at touch screen Step 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 selecting different parameters and entering new values Step 4 Select channels as required Step 5 Press Timing Enter button to send all values in screen Send a timing value
74. impir Modules impri Peaplen Update Frobiles Dare Weimggee Die 5740555 aaa CC ex Pages All Coples L ink Medias Type Plain Paper al ie Color CO Mack Mer Augom atic O Custom Quality E speed Advanced Custom Settings de tummary id Current Data CH All Data OF Data From rel al TC Cancel Current Seitingz fame Letter Portrait 5 Mo Wate marie e PrimtLayout mone i Normal tipi E MoreWeave gt OT High Speed On pon Color Adjustment Special Virtuoso window options These are available for specific windows refer to previous page 276 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Updati 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE UPDATING PROFILES 16 ng Profiles Overview As mentioned in the patch instructions covered in Chapter 2 the Virtuoso console utilizes a resource called a Profile to properly map control of luminaires The Profiles are accessed in the Luminaire Patch windows Refer to Patch on page 25 Profiles see DH age Color 5751 20 be Zoom 1200 3D Sebi bed pa 250 gr e YLI Lecalian D I D Y z DES Pees fo dlrs Ter ba phahi nn The Profiles are stored in a Virtuoso system folder which is accessed each time a new show file is opened Itis possible to import new Profiles and to update older show files with them if desired When a new show file is opened it will automatically contain all Profiles currently resident in the Profiles folder
75. in the command line display by pressing the advance buttons e At command line display press W to move forward Press A to move backward Cue numbers shown in command line display will respond accordingly 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 209 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 210 Separators Separators can be inserted into the Cue Sheet list in order to organize certain groups of cues as necessary The separators can then be used as markers to quickly access the first cue of each group Separator Pull Down Menu Separator Name Used to scroll list to any separator Separator Line E BEES Insert a separator Step 1 At Cue Sheet use cursor to select cue above where you wish to insert separator Step 2 At Cue Sheet menu available when Cue Sheet window is open select New Separator A separator will be inserted Step 3 Using pull out keyboard type name of separator Step 4 Press Enter Go to specified separator e At Cue Sheet window select separator by name from pull down menu Cue Sheet will scroll to beginning of separator line Or e At Cue Sheet menu select separator by name Cue sheet will scroll to beginning of separator line 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES CUE WINDOWS 11 Renumbering Cues The cue number field is editable Note The Move function also effectively renumbers cues Refer to Copy Move on page 165 Submasters Track M
76. included in the cue contents The cue does not need to be active to change its data These special attributes can also be applied to cue ranges In all cases these attributes may be defined using the command line keypad or Cue Board Cue Sheet window Note With these commands the command line keypad defaults to the cue mode making use of the lt Cue gt button optional 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 193 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Shortcuts gt 194 Link Link instructions can be stored with a cue Link instructions allow cues to be run out of sequence by causing a different cue number to be loaded into the submaster s pending file when the cue that carries the link instruction is activated In addition link instructions may also be provided to snapshots macros and effects In the case of a linked effect special conditions apply See To Effects below If a wait or trail time is included with the cue data automatic activation of the linked cue snapshot macro or effect will occur when the wait or trail time has elapsed Store a cue with a link to another cue e Store lt Cue gt n Link lt Cue gt x Enter upon playback of Cue n the linked cue x would be loaded into the same submaster for manual activation Link an existing cue to another cue e lt Cue gt n Link x Enter links Cue n to Cue x Remove a link from a cue e lt Cue gt n Link Enter
77. includes eight integrated DMX universes and supports up to 26 DMX universes with additional equipment The following system capacities are supported by the Virtuoso DX console Control of 2 000 multiple parameter luminaires 2 000 10 000 cues per fixture luminaire dependent 1 000 presets 1 000 effects 100 beam selects 300 color selects 1000 group selects 1 000 board cues 1 000 macros 1 200 snapshots 30 submasters in 3 pages 26 DMX universes 12 April 01 5 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Components Monitor Channel Select Panel optional siege I le SH AAI SS H IAIA Si El SIS Macintosh G4 Computer Console The Virtuoso DX console itself contains buttons keypads encoders faders and displays for the purpose of controlling luminaires Macintosh Computer System An Apple Macintosh G4 computer provides the operating system CPU supports the display monitor s and provides a removable backup medium such as a Zip drive and CD or DVD ROM The removable medium is primarily for importing exporting and backing up show file data while the CD DVD ROM drive is primarily for upgrading Virtuoso DX console software Minimum requirements for Macintosh computer system e Macintosh G4 OS9 or greater e A monitor e Removable backup medium Zip drive etc e CD DVD ROM Additional monitors can be supported by installing additional video cards Pl
78. is found then it will look for a matching Select If no Select is found then the new luminaire will conform to the parameter s by utilizing absolute data 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SPECIAL FEATURES DATA COPY AND MOVE 9 Copy a channel Step 1 Select target channel s Step 2 At touch screen set filters Step 3 At keypad press Recall Chan n where n is the number of the channel you wish to copy Copy Move The Copy Move feature allows manipulation of preset cue sets and sequences data For example the data content of Cue 1 could be copied to Cue 2 using this feature In this case Cue 1 and Cue 2 are now identical When data is moved for example from Cue 1 to Cue 2 the content of Cue 1 is moved to Cue 2 and there will no longer be a Cue 1 in the cue list Pressing the Copy Move button once activates the copy feature while double clicking the button activates the move feature Copy a cue to a new number e At keypad press Copy Move Cue 1 At 201 Enter copies Cue 1 data to Cue 201 Copy a range of cues to a new number range e At keypad press Copy Move Cue 1 Thru 5 At 201 Enter copies Cues 1 5 to Cues 201 205 Move a cue to a new number e At keypad press Copy Move Copy Move Cue 1 At 201 Enter moves Cue 1 data to Cue 201 Cue 1 is now blank Move a range of cues to a new number range e At keypad press Copy Move Copy Move Cue 1 Thru 5
79. merely a way to display and review data and does not Don view Mr Graphic naire Mas ES lithe nasty Ei Snapshot Aier Tie aa WL Calor pida in provide editing functions Open window e At Operation menu select Luminaire Status Data will be displayed for all luminaires Note Commands can be used to open multiple Luminaire Status windows Use the following buttons to display different types of data Value V button displays the numeric value currently being received by the luminaire for each parameter Parameter P button displays the Preset Color or Beam which the parameter is currently referencing default setting Timing 5 button displays any associated timing information and continuous action such as wheel spins Example For Studio Color lens control parameters appear in Effect dynamic Dynamic D displays any associated dynamic state information Data Columns configured in Parameter Columns window Parameter Data Value Data tuminame Ma OO SS 100 rare zB 25 Dynamic Opens Parameter Columns window Displays dynamic state continuous which is used to choose which action information when selected columns appear in window Timing Displays timing information when selected Parameter Displays Preset that luminaire is reporting when selected Value Displays value that luminaire is reporting for the parameters when selected 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONT
80. modes 224 sequence 126 127 128 130 131 sequence timing 221 222 set 122 123 124 125 131 Set 0 122 simultaneous 121 start 121 step time 219 221 stop flag 223 224 storing as a cue 134 sustain time 221 timing 218 219 220 wave time 219 window 133 Encoder 3D 53 beam 52 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A color 52 dynamic states 53 frame 54 image 52 intensity 51 111 min max settings 55 overview 50 pan tilt 51 window 56 Error log 22 280 Export patch 272 venue 3D 257 F Fader affect on intensity 198 grand master 198 intensity 111 submaster 199 Filters beam 149 color 149 overview 146 submaster 149 232 templates 156 with cues 148 Frame encoder 50 54 Freeze submaster 231 Function filter submaster 232 Function keys quick keys 169 setting option 166 using 166 G Gobo 50 52 Grand master 198 Grid Spacing window 27 Groups from Select Display window 91 storing and recalling 90 91 H Highest Takes Precedence concept of 240 02 9668 0001A Image encoder 50 52 Import patch 273 venue 3D 256 Independent submaster 234 Installation additional components 10 console 8 desk lamp 11 Intensity encoder 50 51 111 faders 111 HTP 240 in playback 237 setting from keypad 58 states 110 111 transitions 239 window 62 63 with manual assign 235 K Keypad overview 57 setting parmeters from 58 shortcuts 200 L Lamp control douse 48 reset recalibration 49 start 48 Li
81. next cue The submaster always sequences placing the next sequential cue from the cue sheet or any linked cue in its pending file Linked cues without wait times will await manual execution e Press Go again to play next cue Play previous cue e Press Back to play previous cue previously active on that submaster Subsequent presses of Back will step backwards through cue sheet Play a cue again e Press Run to play active cue again 12 April 01 Shows autofollow time or cue execution time if no autofollow is specified Pending cue Active cue Selects submaster for playback TDA sete Loads cue Plays active cue Wi Bun Stops and e Back through cue Plays last cue Plays pending cue Scales intensity AE VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Stop Step Run 242 Controlling Linked Playback The submaster always sequences placing the linked cue in that submaster s pending file or the specified submaster s pending file Linked cues with an associated wait time will automatically execute after the wait time has elapsed If no wait time has been defined the linked cue will await manual execution A linked macro will automatically execute The Stop Step button can be us
82. or Loop Miscellaneous Shortcuts e Holding down Clear will clear an entire unterminated command line e Pressing Next Last together will reselect the original channel range or group Creating Cue Numbers without Storing Data It is possible to create and label cues without storing data To do this is store a cue while all luminaires are inactive or off line 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 201 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Locating Stored Cues In order to verify if a certain cue number exists or to locate nearest stored cue numbers a shortcut can be used Locate cue number At keypad press Cue n Enter for cue number you wish to verify One of two things will happen e If the cue exists its number and label will be displayed in the command line display e Ifa cue by that number does not exist no cue will be displayed At command line display press Y to move forward or press 2 to move backward The next higher or lower cue numbers nearest the cue number you entered will appear in the display set cue 52 Cue 52 202 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES ADVANCED CUE STORING AND MODIFYING 11 Update The Update feature is used to store modified channels back into their source cues Update When Update is used any channels that had another cue as their source and were modified would not be added to the target cue Tip Update is mo
83. parameter Time is defined in minutes and seconds A submaster mode which inhibits timing values on the associated submaster allowing playback at full speed A touch screen display mode which provides a means of defining timing delay and speed values for any or all combination of parameters A device s X Y and Z coordinates These three coordinates are based on a point of origin X 0 Y 0 Z 0 from which every object in the 3D graphic has been located The touch sensitive screen which allows access to Timing Filter Dynamic State and Sneak settings To force a new parameter setting for selected channels through the cue sheet until a channel block command is encountered or the luminaire parameters affected are set to a different value A different value may come from absolute values that are different a preset value that is different or the same value provided by a different preset Tracking instructions will also be stopped by blocked channels Track may be used in conjunction with Store Update and Selective Store Fill causes the instructions to track backward and forward through the cue sheet A timing attribute which can be applied to a cue causing the next event to be automat ically executed after the trail time has elapsed The trail time begins counting from the moment the cue has completed The next event being either the next sequence cue a linked cue or a linked macro To reverse the last store or delete action o
84. position automatically adjusts the corresponding parameter data for all luminaires that use that focus point for positional information Channel Select Mode KC Pools Render Real Lights Brings up Settings Allows selection of individual Luminaires l options window channels or channel ranges Rendered graphic Center Lines Wireframe style Cones graphic LA Point of Interest Mode Selected luminaire Brings up crosshairs for EEN highlighted ref ina luminaire bear Allows manipulation of etocusing luminaire Deams Camera angle view of scene Select or add camera Refer to next page angle presets This option will greatly reduce the system s operating speed This option is only a representative wireframe graphic style and will not actually speed up performance To configure 3D window for true wireframe functionality go to Settings options refer to 3D Graphic Settings on page 263 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 261 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL While in Channel Select Mode the following options are available e Click on individual luminaires to select for manual control e Hold down left trackpad button and drag cursor across a range of luminaires to select for manual control While in Camera Angle Mode the following options are available e Hold down left trackpad button while using trackpad to move camera angle up down or right left Whichever direction you move first will lock the gra
85. pre programmed set is available which contains all patched channels as a single part This is the default set assumed by all effects unless changed It can be used to quickly create an effect which would be assumed by all the luminaires in your system Set 0 Part 1 all patched channels Interlace Sequential and Random When loading channels across two or more parts the channels may be loaded interlaced sequentially or randomly For example when loading channels 1 6 across two parts using the interlace or sequential methods they would produce the following results Channels loaded interlaced Channels loaded sequentially 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS CREATING EFFECTS 7 From Effects Control Panel Create a set e Step 1 At Effects Control press Set Selects will Set display Sets Parts and Groups Step 2 At Sets select display select a set to create Step 3 Select a group or select desired channels to be stored as a part or parts Step 4 At Effects Control panel press Int Seq to load sequentially or leave unselected to load interlaced refer to Interlace Sequential and Random on page 122 Step 5 Press Store
86. previous cell or field in a row e Use arrow buttons to move cursor through fields 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION OPERATION OVERVIEW 1 The trackpad can be used to manipulate the cursor for field cell editing clicking radio buttons accessing pop up menus moving windows or closing windows Closing Windows Just as with any Macintosh application windows can be closed by clicking the box in their left hand corner Windows can also be closed from the File menu by selecting Close Window Sheva Pla Alda Save A Copy linpert 20 Beckarourg Hear 20 Kecigremd mew Vere Import Yen Einari impart Madules Intecg Pranie tiata Profes Status Indicator Bar Several indicators available at the lower portion of the screen provide an indication of current console status and operations Patch Edit Enabled Disabled Curren shewnls Live Preview Mode Patch On Off Status State Log Messages P Your Show Patch On PATCH EDIT Live Zem System Config Status State Indicates the console state or status in relationship to communication between the Macintosh CPU and Console Interface Card CIC The following indications may be displayed Online Channels 1 6 e P Primary console PP Primary Prep where the Mac opens the show file and initializes the CIC for downloads e PL Primary Load where the show file is loaded to the CIC and Mac e PS Primary S
87. routes control to first SS 1000 channels my 1000 routes control to second 1000 channels When lit indicates range selected 100 D 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 000 1000
88. same Note As a caution when altering parameters for more than ten cues a confirmation window will open Selective Store all selected channels into a cue Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual control set parameters as required Step 3 At touch screen set filters as required Step 4 Press Sel Store lt Cue gt n Enter All selected channels are re stored into the specified cue at current stage levels Only those parameters allowed by the filter settings are affected 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES ADVANCED CUE STORING AND MODIFYING 11 Modify a preset using Selective Store Step 1 At touch screen display modify filter settings as required Step 2 Select required channels Step 3 Press Sel Store Preset Select Button or Sel Store Preset n Enter where n is the discrete Preset number Undo reverse a Selective Store command e Undo Enter reverses the last store update delete command Selective Recall The Selective Recall feature is used to recall specific parameter data from specified channels active or inactive in a cue preset or beam state Guidelines e Selective Recall routes through the filter settings If Timing is selected at the touch screen filter then the parameter and its timing information will be recalled making that the current state e If Timing is not selected at the touch screen filter then only the paramete
89. setup as desired Step 3 At File menu select Export Step 4 At Save window name file and select ame location for storing A est Step 5 Click Save to save 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 257 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 258 Match 3D The Match 3D feature available in the Drawing Size window allows importing of the size and window positioning coordinates from the 3D graphic into the Plan View This requires that a 3D graphic has been previously imported Import 3D specifications into Plan View Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 At Operation menu select 3D Graphic to open 3D Graphic window At Operation menu select Plan View Plan View window will open and 2D Display menu will become available on menu bar At 2D Display menu select Drawing Size Drawing Size window will Click Match 3D to import specifications Import specifications from Size and Window Top Left boxes Window Top Lett x Y Click to import 3D Lg are specifications into LE Plan View Pioteh Mi requires tte 20 pido tato do he open Ga 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 3D GRAPHIC DISPLAY 3D DisPLAY WINDOW 15 3D Display Window Defining X Y Z Locations An X Y and Z location for each luminaire is defined in its patch information These coordinates can be entered at the time the luminaire is initially patched or any time later The coordinates are based on a point of origin X 0 Y 0 Z 0
90. shutter framing edge frost effect prism and gobo static rotating index effects effects rotation as determined by the beam edge and gobo filter settings refer to Filter Mode on page 146 Beams are stored by luminaire types This means that for any one luminaire type only one Beam setting can be stored in a single Beam select For example a select can store different settings for VL5 and VL6 luminaires but multiple settings cannot be stored for multiple VL5 luminaires During a store operation the beam parameters stored will be drawn from either the lowest active luminaire or lowest selected luminaire as determined by the console s default setting refer to Settings Window on page 245 Beam Select Guidelines e Beams are not linked to Presets or cues This means that if a certain Beam was used when creating a Preset or cue and a new Beam is stored into that select then this will not affect the Beam stored in the Preset or cue e Parameters stored into a Beam select are always determined by the filters e Timing values cannot be stored in Beams Indicates that Beams have been selected Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 10 20 74 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS BEAMS A Beam Palette Data Window Beam data can be viewed in the Beam Palette Data window Cue Data Preset Data Color Pie De Data The top portion of the window shows the beam l
91. slower rate than when flashing during a Macro record operation Step 3 At desk perform new action s Step 4 To store back into original number Press Update Board Cue Enter To store into new number Press Store Board Cue n Enter or Store Board Cue n Label Enter xxxxxx return 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 189 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 190 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER Lh 02 9668 0001A Advanced Cue Features This chapter contains instructions for storing and modifying cues utilizing advanced console features These instructions build on the basic store and playback instructions provided in the Basic Cues chapter on page 107 e Special Cue Attributes e Advanced Cue Storing and Modifying e Cue Windows 12 April 01 191 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 192 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES SPECIAL CUE ATTRIBUTES 11 Special Cue Attributes Overview In addition to parameter data cues can contain the following special attributes Link Loop Auto Follow AF Type Wait or Trail Auto Follow AF Time Out Time Note These special attributes can also be applied to board cues as required Guidelines When a cue is stored these cue attributes may be entered in any order If a cue is defined as an effect cue then crossfade instructions may not be
92. the timing information can be recalled as needed Macros are stored in the Macro select banks and can be accessed on any of the select displays just as Presets Colors Beams Groups Snapshots and Effects For instruc tions on using the select displays refer to the Select Displays chapter on page 65 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES MACROS 10 Recording Macros Using Record Button D The quickest method for recording macros utilizes the select display and command Macro line keypad Store button When Macro Rec is pressed the button will flash indicating that the recording function is enabled Pressing a second time will disable the record function in the event you need to abort the action Record a macro Step 1 At a manual control select display press Bank Function Macro Step 2 Press Macro Rec Button will flash Step 3 Enter sequence of button presses display selections or command line entries Step 4 Press Store Macro Select Button Macro Rec button will stop flashing Label a macro When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard e Label Macro Select Button xxxxxx return Indicates that Macros have been selected Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 179 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 180 From Keypad The macro
93. this number even when given another label For example if a focus parameter is stored into Preset 1 and relabeled as Home it would still be recalled at the keypad by pressing Preset 1 Enter Standard Beams and Colors The console is configured with a pre stored set of standard Beam and Color palettes You can use these defaults with your system or replace them with custom settings Standard Beam Palette As a default the Beam select provides standard static and rotating gobo wheel positions The data in this case wheel positions stored into the select display is referred to as a palette Standard Color Palette As a default the Color select provides a standard palette of 80 colors which can be used to apply color parameters to applicable luminaires The default color palette supports color mixes for VARI LITE luminaires only These colors are not numbered according to the VARI LITE Color System Colors can be applied using VARI LITE color numbers through the VL Color Data window Refer to the VARILITE Color System chapter on page 93 for more information 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 67 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Note Some DMX profiles have as a default the full frame wheel positions Color mixing is not supported in the color palette as a default but may be added to the palette as needed Panel Select Displays Three select displays are located on the console s front panel
94. to 1 2 seconds Set intensity up and down time while storing a cue For this shortcut the first Time entered is always Up and the second is Down Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 Ensure all parameters at Timing screen are deselected Step 3 Press Store Cue x Time m Time n Enter stores Cue x with an up time of m and a down time of n Set timing back to zero Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At screen window select a parameter Step 3 Press Time 0 Enter Time and delay values stay in a luminaire until changed or set back to zero Use the Luminaire Status window with time selected to view current timing and delays To clear delay timing select channel and appropriate parameters in the Timing window and set delay to 0 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 145 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Filter Mode Important gt gt 146 Overview Filters are used to withhold or mask certain parameters or parameter attributes from a preset or a cue and to control what is recalled in a submaster It is important to note the exact meaning of the term filter as used in Virtuoso console operation When a parameter is not filtered i e selected highlighted at the Filter screen its data would be transferred during any subsequent store or recall operations When a parameter is filtered i e not selected highlighted its data would be withheld from a data transfer
95. to compose set parts with the limitation that a channel may only appear once within the set The second component is a Sequence A sequence includes a number of steps each of which define an action that an individual set part is to take Discrete instructions colors beams presets and cues can be used to create a step Example of a Effect 1 3 Step 3 Part Effect Part 1 Channels 1 10 Part 2 Channels 11 20 Part 3 Channels 21 30 Set Channels Sequence Y Actions Step 1 Preset 25 Step 2 Beam 13 Step 3 Cue 8 Note Timing values can be defined for effects on an overall effect and or sequence level Timing however will be discussed in the Advanced Effects Features chapter on page 215 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 117 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Effects Control Panel and Windows All effects and effect components sets sequences parts steps can be created using either the Effects Control panel in combination with the select displays the effects windows and for some components the command line keypad Effects Control Panel The Effects Control panel is located on the console desk and works together with the three select displays for more information on select display operation refer to General Operation on page 67 When the Effect button is pressed at the
96. used for building cues As a default the Color select may contain a palette of 80 default colors however it is possible to store your own Colors over the defaults and relabel as required Color like Beams are stored by luminaire types This means that for any one luminaire type only one Color setting can be stored in a single Color select For example a select can store different colors for VLS and VL6 luminaires but multiple colors cannot be stored for multiple VL5 luminaires During a store operation the color parameters stored will be drawn from either the lowest active luminaire or lowest selected luminaire as determined by the console s default setting refer to Settings Window on page 245 Note The default color palette supports color mixes for VARIXLITE luminaires only These colors are not numbered according to the VARI LITE Color System Colors can be applied using VARI LITE color numbers through the VL Color Data window Refer to the VARI LITE Color System chapter on page 93 for more infor mation Color Select Guidelines e Colors are not linked to Presets or cues This means that if a certain Color select was used when creating a cue and a new color is stored into that select then this will not affect the color stored in the Preset or cue e Parameters stored into a Color select are filtered only when the console s default setting is configured to do so refer to Settings Window on page 245 Indi
97. what value will be stored During playback the intensity level will affect the overall intensity output Intensity states levels can be controlled using several methods which include the Intensity encoder associated intensity state buttons command line entry submasters fader positions Grand Master fader position and the Black Out feature Because of the complexity of this subject intensity state level discussions are provided in stages throughout this manual as follows Subject Explanation Intensity states for storing cues Intensity States on page 110 How faders affect cue storing How Faders Affect Intensity on page 198 How faders affect playback Playback Intensity Level on page 237 The Four Intensity States There are four intensity states that determine which parameters are stored and in some cases at what level These are set by the intensity encoder and or the intensity state buttons e Active intensity value greater than zero 1 100 When a luminaire is active it will store data for all parameters including intensity e Marked intensity state of marked 0 level When a luminaire is marked it will store data for all parameters with intensity stored as marked 0 level When a cue is recalled a marked luminaire will move to the stored position and if previously active fade out with the luminaire s intensity down time e Zero intensity state of zero hard zero 0 level
98. while pressing buttons 1 7 as required which correspond to Presets Colors Beams Groups Macros Bank Function Snaps snapshots or Effects Button Palette Shift Button Presets The Palette Shift button allows toggling between two different select display configurations For example the first one could be the default selections BEAMS COLORS and PRESETS Pressing Palette Shift highlighting button would bring up GROUPS SNAPSHOTS and MACROS Pressing Palette Shift again deselecting button would bring back BEAMS COLORS and PRESETS and vice versa These two configurations can be changed as desired by mapping the selects to different display locations see previous page CH 1 0 O 0 1 O O Donna ae i
99. will do nothing Fade out in n seconds System will fade out in the specified number of seconds Go to Cue n Luminaires will assume the specified cue action Startup Action Default No startup action This setting determines what event is to occur upon power up of the console You may specify one of the following Macro Console will execute the specified macro Snapshot Console will execute the specified snapshot Date Time Stamp Sets the computer s internal date and time values for the console Units Default English This sets the unit of measure used with the 2D 3D location configuration Palette Store Options Default Lowest Active This setting tells the console whether to draw data from lowest active or lowest selected channel during a Beam or Color store operation The lowest active setting draws data from the lowest channel number with intensity of that type regardless of selection The lowest selected setting draws data from the lowest selected channel number of that type regardless of intensity state 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SYSTEM SETUPS DEFAULT OPTIONS 14 Use of Filters with Color Store Default Filters not used This setting defines whether or not function filters impact Color select store Operations Buttons Keys This setting defines which direction the keypad y and 2 arrows will function Timecode Autoswitch Default Off This setting defines whether the inte
100. will have control of the connected devices e Power Up DMX Systems e Power Up VARIXLITE Systems e Patch e Patch Editing 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 17 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 18 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH POWER UP DMX SYSTEMS 2 Power Up DMX Systems Powering Up Console Once your Virtuoso DX console has been connected to the system you will need to power up the console and verify status of the connected devices To power up console and verify system connections Step 1 At rear of console set power switch to ON position Step 2 At Macintosh computer press power button Step 3 Wait for console panels to initialize and Virtuoso application to launch A new show file or last open ad show file will automatically open Step 4 Verify that your console appears in System Configu ration window Refer to System Configuration Window on page 20 Powering Down Console When powering down the console for storage or in the event a restart is required use the following procedure To power down console Step 1 At Virtuoso menu select Shut Down Step 2 At rear of console set power switch to OFF position 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 19 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL System Configuration Window When in a DMX environment the System Configuration Config window displays the console icon This allows ac
101. will ignore the command For example a luminaire without a color wheel would not respond to a Spin Color Wheels state Store a dynamic state Step 1 Select required channel s Step 2 At screen window select desired state Luminaires will assume dynamic action Step 3 At soft encoder display select Dyn Adjust applicable encoders and min max buttons to set axis size and speed Step 4 Store cue or preset as usual Switch to a different state while one is already running e At screen window select new state Luminaires will assume new dynamic action Stop a dynamic state When a dynamic state is stopped the luminaires will return to their last static position prior to executing the dynamic state e Press Stop to halt the dynamic action of selected luminaires 152 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Sneak Mode Overview TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS SNEAK MODE 3 The Sneak Mode works in conjunction with the command line keypad to provide manual control of luminaires The Sneak Mode has a dual purpose First it provides a graphic display of command line entries that would not normally be visible When programming cues using command line manual control it will display the luminaire settings as they are sent to the luminaires Second it provides a means of creating manual control moves on the fly By using the Sneak Mode values can be assigned to parameters and then recalled using a specified time lumi
102. 01A Index Numerics 2D Display background picture 27 drawing size 27 grid spacing 27 Plan View 2D mode 27 37 snap to grid 27 3D encoder 50 53 3D graphic display filter 262 exporting 257 importing venue 256 new venue 255 overview 255 Plan View 3D mode 27 35 37 Settings window 263 venue size 255 window 261 X y Z locations 259 A Ad hoc groups creating 161 overview 161 At function key 168 Autoload effect 223 function key 167 B Background state 129 Beam data window 75 encoder 50 52 overview 74 setting from keypad 59 standard selects 67 storing and recalling 76 77 78 using filters with 149 Black out 198 Board cue deleting 186 overview 184 recalling 187 recording 185 02 9668 0001A sheet window 188 Bump submaster 236 C Channel copy 164 DMX test 279 ranges 44 selecting 41 Channel filter submaster 233 Channel select active 43 all 43 clear 43 desk buttons 47 from keypad 44 from panel 45 invert 43 mark 43 next last 47 51 overview 41 panel 7 selecting range 43 46 status mimic 44 using Next Last 47 window 42 zero 43 Color data window 81 encoder 50 52 overview 80 setting from keypad 59 standard selects 67 storing and recalling 82 83 using filters with 149 Vari Lite colors 95 96 97 98 Colors Vari Lite applying 96 97 data window 96 for DMX fixtures 102 for Vari Lite luminaires 98 overview 95 Command Line see Keypad 200 Configuration system console ID 20 23
103. 1 Select required channels only selected channels that have data stored in that preset will be affected Step 2 Ensure Presets are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Press required Preset Select Button 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 87 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 88 Recall a preset using command line keypad Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels that have data stored in that Preset will be affected Step 2 Press Preset n Enter where n is the discrete Preset number Recall specific preset data Note For more information refer to Selective Recall on page 205 Step 1 At touch screen display select Filter mode Using touch screen select parameters to be recalled Step 2 Select channel s as required Step 3 Press Recall Preset n Enter or Recall Preset Select Button All stored data will be recalled from the specified preset n as defined by the selections on the filters From Select Displays Window When storing or modifying Presets from the Select Displays first select channels to be stored in the Preset select refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 Filter parameters as required and adjust with manual control functions To store label update delete and recall Presets refer to the procedures given in Select Displays Window on page 71 From Keypad Note All Presets have a discrete number which is used when accessin
104. 2 9668 0001A 3D GRAPHIC DISPLAY 3D FEATURES 15 3D Layer Control The clipping process used by the Virtuoso software to manage beam intersections when they meet objects in the 3D graphic can be processor intensive and slow down performance of the 3D graphic feature As an option to speed up performance Virtuoso offers a method for specifying individual layers of the imported dwg or dxf graphic not to be clipped Note In VectorWorks a layer is referred to as a class To specify layer s for non clipping n e In drawing package rename layer starting wit For example truss When importing Virtuoso will recognize this indicator and not clip beams when they meet objects in this layer Exporting a Scene A scene from the 3D Graphic window can be exported in 3dmf format for use with 3D modeling applications The exported file will retain all of its 3D modeling parameters so that it may be altered or re rendered as required The export function will capture the current scene displayed in the 3D Graphic window at the time Export is selected Note The Export option will only be available if the 3D Graphic window is open Export a venue Step 1 If required insert View favorites Zip disk for Select a location Access a View previous saving your 3D for saving network or server files venue model into console Zip drive Step 2 Ensure that 3D Graphic window is CALA babe Faite Y open and
105. 22 E TTT E 122 Interlace Sequential and Random cono conan corn nannos 122 Erom Etf cts Control Panel tits 123 From Sets Wind OW get e RENE dE EE EEN ENEE 124 Creating SEQUENCES eerste dee edd insolitas fausthiNlsotnsonesctagaes Phgusneyeesuget iss 126 From Effects Control Panela oneens n En E eesse ii tant 127 From Sequences Windouw nono n conc cnc cnn nrannrnn conca 128 Background Station pct dada 129 From Effects Select Displays ociscene eeii a conan 129 From Sequences Wrndow nono nnrna crono no nannnannncnnnoos 130 Creating ET 131 Erom Key Dades tea ti a e at aia 131 From Effects Select Displays oconiccnncnnncnnocnonnconncnnnnncnano non nonnncnnncnnrancrnn conan 132 Brom Effects Window c 5 tscesszcccce sede tesa e REE Ea E EE EEE dere lilas 133 Storing Bffects as EE 134 Playback Basic Play baken Ageeugen SEN hore ipe AAA ENEE 135 Submaster Displays gees nba ssi ail See a hee a 136 Chapter 8 Timing Filter Displays Overview Timing Pilter Beatuteg e eegtet eg yay it Pema nies nae 139 General Touch Screen Window Operapons ran nannncnnnoo 139 Timing Mode EINEN tee EE EE ere ed 141 Time Speed Horm ats rica di eave Ee 142 BEI 142 Delay A AAA AAA A 142 o EEEE E E EE EEE T AREE 143 Timing Mode Operatton nono i Ae r e a a 143 Filter Mode EINEN Eeer e EE EE E NE A E E ESEE 146 Filt r Mode Chpetattg iscrpio eaea ia ea riel a 148 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xvii VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL
106. 27 30 40 4790 57 20 TS AER O 2919 437 517 500 CR TS 1001 1006 1104 4108 LS SSP Cossa Sie Dando Trte 1 10 17 20 27 30 5700 47 50 57 70 77 40 EF m Tr 13144 It Aa APO SS 00 TZ PEA KE Col 708 725 755 757 124059 I SITPA och Ste Donki Thurber B Sta I 17 20 222 2505272 ST 241 508 789 757 THE TO 775 TIT TTS TT e Thurber d 305149 156 175 20 205 254 260 272 279 358 361 452 47 317 570 388 739 757 759 760 775 777 778 12 10 99 1 90 A6 PH Consale Stile Besenband Thambe 422 472 912 220 12410591 51 09PH Commis State Demi Thate 1 75 10 17 20 27 30 27 40 47 50 55 20 77 60 CAI A IR DAGA SEND ON TES 17S TIA PAA SUPP Dech SDr Thri 200 225 254 260 265 393 132 MSGS EST 120091 SI 18 PH Cost ive fenkt Thurber 110 17 20 27 00 80 47 90 7700 aS 9 SE E 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE DATA MANAGEMENT 16 Printing The console software comes with a print driver to accommodate an Epson Stylus Color InkJet printer However any Macintosh compatible printer can be connected and used to print data from these windows e Cue Sheet e Board Cue Sheet e Cue Data e Preset Data e Color Palette e Beam Palette Data Data e Patch e Plan View e Macros e Snapshots e Console Log e 3D Location Allows extra print setup options See below Important Notes e In order to compact the information the software will reduce all text font sizes to 7 point e The Plan View will be reduced s
107. 3 El servicio debe ser realizado solamente por personal calificado ADVERTENCIA INTERFERENCIA RF 1 Este es un producto de Clase A En el ambiente de la casa este producto puede ocasionar radiointerferencia en cuyo caso el usuario debe tomar las medidas adecuadas x 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ECKE EE RA IAE See TR LOEB DVa aTVOREVICHT Ole METS CHAS KEW EK SPR ADU HL FIAT BEAT SBC SP C OVERS Os ELA LTS EEN Ae Say IVC WL EE di CWT LAN A E EE SERED DOES L Ce AFFORD SERED ES KE IER FOUR BM IE ZO V TO ARO EA EE KROBER BSR OODEYVb L Ea KERMIT ABA ltz RCMB HUA ENLT CPA wi RBZ EDOLrY A 1 VARIXLITEOS HHE RoR UE CHEAT SED 2 WON ABM CLAOSZWBAMICRO MI AL RMB ES Lio E 2 VARIXLITEO BD DS ZERRA TARA ATEC ER EI o TIRAN 3 ARRARR A O EPL SRI BEREFRORMO AABT kILTI KAW eG RF FH 1 ARIANE Class A COA MET AHI FER BVT HEAR AAA TERESE ET COBB ERAIK UE eR RIT METRE BRS BDO ET 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xi VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank xii 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents Introduction About A MA a cada ci 1 Additional DocumentatiON ooooooconcncnccnnnononononononononononononononononinanononcananananana conoce nana nananos 1 Obtaining Additiona
108. 6 VL7 No To VL2C VL4 VL5 VL5A VL5B VL6B VL7B Pink Tint 101 Lux 55 Match Match Almost 350 Match Bastard Amber 103 Lux 02 Match Match Match Match Match GAM Bastard 104 GAM 325 Match Match Match Match Match Amber Warm Bastard 105 Lee 162 Match Match Match Match 360 Match Amber Pale Golden 107 Lux 09 Almost Match Match Match Match Amber Light Amber 110 Lux 16 Match Match Almost Match Match Lee 204 Light Flame 112 Lux 17 Match Match Almost Almost Match Medium Bastard 115 Lux 04 Almost Match Match Match Match Amber Dark Bastard 116 Lux 03 Match Almost Match Match Amber Warm Amber 122 Lee 176 Match Match Match Match Match Lux 01 Peach 125 GAM 320 Almost Match Almost Match Match Flesh Pink 131 Lux 34 Match Match Match Match Match Dark Pink 134 Lee 111 Match Match Match Match Match Medium Salmon 136 Lux 32 Match Match Almost Match Match Salmon 138 Lux 41 Match Match Match Match Match Brite Pink 141 Lee 128 Match Match Almost Almost Match Dark Peach 145 Match Match Match Match Lee Magenta 149 Lee 113 Match Almost Match Almost Dark Salmon 151 Match Almost Almost Match Deep Salmon 155 Match Match Match Dark Red 161 Match Medium Red 164 Lux 27 Match Match Match Match Match Primary Red 168 Lee 106 Match Almost Match Match Match Dark Orange 173 Lux 26 Match Match Match Almost Match Light Red 177 GAM 235 Match Match Match Match Match Dark Orange 181 Match Match Match Match Almost 98 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM VARI LIT
109. 72 Update neet val reia 72 Delete tina tabs nuughusseiebenics 713 ii O A A EE EE Eat 73 Beams OVV EW aee A ae eee ee 74 Beam Palette Data Window oooconnccnnccnococonononcconocanccnn non noconocnn nono nana rnn nono ii ninas 75 Storing Modifying and Recalling Beams noo 76 From Panel Select Displays crono ran cono non nccnnccnncnnnos 76 From Select Displays Window ooooocococonocononononcnonncnncconocononnnnnnn oran c cnn non nc cn nccnnnnnnos 78 From Keypad invada 78 Colors EINEN E 80 Color Palette Data Window AA 81 Storing and Recalling Colors reins arenei n a A a ESE 82 From Panel Select Displays 2 0 0 tr id a 82 From Select Displays Window ooooocccoconocanonononnconnnoncconoconannncnnc oran cona non n ocn nccnncnnnos 83 Brom Keypad sce 2 2seusvisetisocit lessee hos Bolded each ees ia 83 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xv VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Presets AE 84 Preset Data Wind Wincom ds 85 Storing Modifying and Recalling Presets AA 86 From Panel Select Displays 0 0 0 ieena niaaa ia ina 86 From Select Displays Window 00 ceccessesseceseeeeeeeeeeseeceaeceeceseeceseeseeseneeaaeenaeens 88 Prom Keypad ica Ee EE he Eege ns 88 Groups hRS Eed tr AER EE 90 Storing Modifying and Recalling Groups oooooocccoccnocanonoconanancnnnnono nono ncnnncnnncnnnannncnnos 90 From Panel Select Displays 2 0 0 0 eeccsseceseceseceseeseeeseeescecsaeceeecsaecaeeseeesneenaecnaeens 90 From Select Displays Windo
110. 95 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL d Import Options window will open Select inches or cm and click OK Truss graphic will appear in Plan View window Select Arrow Luminaire Icon Selectors 3D Mode Selector Truss Graphic Note In order for the patched luminaires to appear correctly in the 3D graphic window luminaire icons should be placed while Plan View is in 3D mode default 4 At Plan View window click on VL5 luminaire icon selector Point cursor at desired location on plan view truss and click to place icon Note Depending on the type of fixture being patched a slightly different style patch window will be opened VARIXLITE DMX or Conventional In this example only the VARIXLITE Luminaire Patch window is used 296 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A wona A 5 Luminaire Patch window will open with default settings For this tutorial we will use the default settings Click Save to accept Device Type Selector menu Default 3D location settings Channel Number kamp Casal Erir Contr l gim a Cites E T Santen Probe Leg E 5 Click to save data 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 patching three VL5 luminaires and two VL6 lumi naires see screen capture below Use default channel numbering so that these will correspond to channels 1 5 VL5 Icon VL6 Icon Channel Number RI 7 At Patch menu select Disable Editing 8 Save Patch Changes win
111. A 12 April 01 163 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Data Copy and Move 164 Copy Channel The Copy Channel feature is used to copy current parameter settings from one luminaire to another or to a group of luminaires All parameter settings including any timing values can be copied as permitted by any filter settings at the touch screen Cue data however will not be copied The luminaire from which data is being copied is referred to as the source luminaire The luminaires receiving the data are referred to as target luminaires The target luminaires will immediately conform to the selected parameter data including spin properties of the source luminaire If the source luminaire does not have data stored for a particular parameter or the parameter has been filtered from the operation then the target luminaires will not change their current settings for those parameters Once the target luminaires have conformed to the new parameter data you may store a new cue or continue to manipulate the luminaires via manual control and then store a cue How Data is Derived from Presets If the source luminaire contains data provided by a Preset then the system uses a hierarchy to determine how to translate this data to the target luminaire The system will first look for a matching Preset number For example if the source contains data from Preset 2 then the new luminaire will look for Preset 2 If no matching Preset
112. A 12 April 01 173 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Storing Snapshots Snapshots are stored in the Snapshots select banks and can be accessed on any of the select displays just as Presets Colors Beams Groups Macros and Effects or from the keypad For instructions on using the select displays refer to the Select Displays chapter on page 65 Store a snapshot using window and keypad Step 1 Configure console as required Step 2 At Operation menu select Snapshot Filter Snapshot Filter window will open Time aia Step 3 At window select area to be snapshot and or click on arrow to drop down submasters window and select any required submasters to be snapshot Step 4 Press Store Snap Shot n Enter The portions of the console indicated in the snapshot window will be stored in the target snapshot Selects all panels Monitor 3 and submasters Deselects all panels Monitor 1 Monitor 4 and submasters Monitor 2 Channel Select Use cursor to select panels to be captured Effects Manual Control Drops down submasters selections Toggles row on or off Submasters Playback Includes the Snapshot Filter window in snapshot when checked 174 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES SNAPSHOTS 10 Store a snapshot using select display Step 1 Configure console as required Step 2 At Operation menu select Snapshot Filter Snapshot Filter window will open
113. A 12 April 01 289 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL e Ifthe Timecode Autoswitch is enabled the system will continue executing events in the normal sequence using its internal time clock until the system can resync At that point the external time clock will take over again and the internal clock will sync to those values e Ifthe Timecode Autoswitch is disabled the system will stop executing events until timecode is resynced After resyncing execution of events will resume Recording Timecode is recorded using the Timecode window The timecode and corresponding event steps are stored in a Timecode Script which can be viewed and edited using the Timecode Scripts window refer to next page Unless a different script number is selected in the window the script will be stored as Number 1 by default To record timecode into a script other than 1 select its number at the Timecode Scripts window Record Timecode Step 1 At Operation menu select Time Code Timecode window will open Cue Sheri Beard Cue Seet Man view KB Step 2 Select External or Internal M0 Graphic Ke Leninalre Matus Si hiliniity Eil Step 3 Select a frame rate Step 4 Press record button to begin timed recording Clock will start counting Step 5 Execute cues Step 6 Press stop button Indicates status Recording Internal Playback etc Frame Aate Da O 30 Drop Select source Record Select one or more frame
114. ARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Assigning Effects Level Timing Timing can be assigned and modified using the encoders command line keypad or the Effects window From Select Displays SS P i a j i Assign timing WY 0 18 g Step 1 At Effects Control press Effects Bee Eff d S O Step 2 At Effects select display press Effect C O de Select Button of effect you wish to modify Step 3 Using encoders set times as required To FadeOut set all step times to same value turn ON 4 23 encoder to 0 00 and then up to required _ value Q Re Step 4 Press Store Effect Select Button to si P store changes From Effects Window Assign a Fade In Fade Out Duration or Step time Step 1 At Data menu select Effects Effects window will open Cie Daba Freset Deta Color Palside Dala Bram Palette Daa Step 2 Using keyboard enter timing information in Time and Duration columns as required Random Fade Out Time How many times the set Affects the step triggering order set will run through the just as direction does forward Fade In Time sequence before stopping reverse oscillate except it chooses steps at random instead of by How long it will take the effect Overall Effect specific order and also affects their to loop back to the beginning Duration Time timing Label eql Dir M
115. AVE A COPY isidro cialis 272 Export Patel nicas dcir it ii ote let 272 Import Patch racial ia AE 273 Console Log iii A R de ce 274 Empathie 275 Updating Profiles OVELVIEW ee dada dee ees geed dui 277 Importing Profiles ii a ie 277 Updating Show File Profiles A 278 xxii 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TABLE OF CONTENTS On Line Diagnostics DMX Channel Tests ii A dd a ai 279 Error LOS criminal conocia iii 280 Off Line Diagnostics E EE 281 Diagnostic Mode Operanon conan conc nn nacnnnrnanrnaccnnaoos 282 Chapter 17 Show Control by External Devices Concepts About MPSM E ae e tdi 285 Input Options ii said 286 MIDI Notes Note Mapping uscar 287 MIDI SMPTE Timecode REN 289 Synchronizing Brotoeol 400 Verte cali dencia 289 A EE eae Ee EE EE es 290 Timecode Scripts Window iii 291 Appendix A Tutorial O NN 311 Appendix C Technical Specifications Weisht Dimensions 2 A A tt 321 Power R guirementSen nanna n cirrosis 321 System Capacitan ieonta 322 Int rtace Support EEN 322 Optional Equipment Support 0 0 eee esessecsseceeeeseeeesecsaeceaeeeeeseeeeaaeceaeesaeceaeeneeeees 322 Appendix D Index NO 323 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xxiii VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Appendix E Reference Fold Outs Virtuoso M DX Console Overview oooconocononooonnnnnnnnnonononononononononoconocononononononononononinanincnss 329 Virtuoso DX Console Connecpong 330 Channel Select Lamp StatUS ccuciosstotoisocci
116. Alto od ol A 223 Run Stop Control e ssssesiss cess eddsatesaeccnasaeteasagcdeaned cocksiaueess AER nacida 224 XX 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 13 Submasters Submaster Overview Panel S bmastetS victoria leia ias E ATETA OA 227 Submasters Wind Wieimvmtcania a ENEE EE 228 Submaster Modes Using Choose and Clear iio aa 229 CO A O E 229 Clinton aii 230 Rd A A A A late A RAEN 231 A Kate NN a 231 Function EE 232 Channel FIET coil citrato irse 233 Dynamic Disables oia ita ile eee ed eee ane 233 Timina Disable A A AA al et gen ae 233 Independent analicen 234 ManUalASSI RE 234 Intensity Level with Manual Assign ooooonccnnncnocononcconcconncnn nono ncnnccnnccnnnranncnnnnnnnoos 235 Ek EE 236 Board Command Disable oir to titi 236 Playback Intensity Level How Playback Intensity is Determned AAA 237 Example Scenarios EE 238 Intensity Transitions 4 fia a Ee Sanne aoa 239 HTP Highest Takes Precedence joccuri anai aoi i e ask 240 Playback Advanced Playback Of Cues neronen ernes ere d e i ei 241 Controlling Linked Playback cooiinii iii 242 Fade Times for Marked Zero Out Cues ooooconoccccnooncnonnnnoncnnnnnccnnnnonnnanonnccnancconnncnnnnanns 242 Chapter 14 System Setups Default Options Settings WINdO Wii a 245 Detault Explanations iaa a A tas iria 246 Emergency Action EE 246 Startup ACU OM iia leia sail eones ia suger 246 Date Time Stap enee rave 246 US E cti 246 Palette Store Optom ii
117. BACK INTENSITY LEVEL 13 Playback Intensity Level old Out How Playback Intensity is Determined Earlier in this manual intensity was discussed in relation to cue store operations refer to Intensity States on page 110 and How Faders Affect Intensity on page 198 This stored intensity state or level along with the current setting of submaster and Grand Master faders are used in determining the final playback intensity level for any given event As previously mentioned the Grand Master fader is used to master the overall intensity output for the console while the individual submaster faders control the intensity level of events being played back Final intensity is determined by the following combination e Intensity value stored in the cue or effect being played back Fader setting of the submaster being used to playback the event If more than one submaster is selected and their levels are different then the HTP principle will also be involved Refer to HTP Highest Takes Precedence on page 240 e Setting of the Grand Master fader or associated Black Out button Intensity values are routed through the faders as follows Active Cue Effect Intensity Value Y Submaster Fader Setting Ifthe Manual Control panel Intensity encoder is moved while a cue is active in a Y submaster and channels are selected the submaster fader is disabled and the following applies Grand M
118. Button b selects Encoder 4 for control of second motor Encoder 5 ALL flip H flips framed image to a horizontal position flip V flips framed image to a vertical position Encoder 6 ROTATE mid sends framing mechanism back to its mid point rot 90 rotates framing mechanism 90 degrees from its current position 54 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL ENCODER CONTROL 3 Storing New Default Min Max Settings The min max buttons associated with each function can be programmed with your own default settings as required These settings are referred to as hard soft in out etc depending on the mechanism being controlled The initial console default settings which correspond to the luminaire s actual min max values can be re stored with your own min max settings The min max settings are based on channel selection This means that a E tac ae 2 ends default setting different minimum and maximum setting to selected channels can be defined for every channel or for User programmable groups of channels as required For example if Channel 1 is patched as a VLS oy luminaire you could select its channel and G d es then store appropriate min max settings de COCH You could then deselect Channel 1 and i select Channel 2 which for example is Y patched as a VL6 luminaire and store Se different min max settings Depending on GC whether Channel 1 or Channel 2 is selected the min max settings woul
119. DBP 69314122 0 69208615 3 69207692 1 69121029 2 3768727 1 3750201 8 3587270 5 3279888 1 3274291 6 DGM G9312884 DGM 9407689 8 European Patents No 0586049 FR GB 0547732 BE DK FR GB 0534710 BE FR GB 0474202 BE DK FR GB 0253082 BE FR GB 0253081 BE FR GB 0192882 BE FR GB 0140994 BE FR GB 0060068 BE FR GB France Design Reg No 335132 335147 Spain Patents No 2090191 2084289 2082384 2058071 2020960 0548328 Spain Utility Model No 2031748 Spain Design Reg No 129596 Japan Patents No 2 059 669 2 055 324 2 002 168 1 889 481 1 770 241 1 723 825 1 683 007 1 553 011 KR 206051 181180 76310 47673 Japan Design Reg No 947552 945436 1 945436 Korean Design Reg No 175178 Mexico Patents No 180148 179138 Taiwan Patents No 78726 66975 65380 63471 40611 28275 United Kingdom Design Reg No 2042174 2033108 2029499 Apple Macintosh and FireWire are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc All other brand or product names which may be mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Virtuoso DX Console User s Manual The information furnished in this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice Vari Lite Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual All information and graphic representat
120. Delete Group 5 Enter Effect Recalls an effect Example Effect 5 Enter Full Sets intensity value to 100 Example lt Chan gt 5 Full Enter Group Stores or recalls a group Example lt Chan gt 1 Thru 9 Store Group 5 Enter Label Used to label cues groups macros effects etc Example Store Beam 5 Label Enter xxxxxx return Link Links together cues effects snapshots and macros for auto playback Example lt Cue gt 2 Link Macro 3 Enter Loop Defines the number of times a linked sequence of cues is to execute Example lt Cue gt 5 Loop 9 Enter Macro Stores or recalls a Macro requires additional button presses during store Example Store Macro Enter Out Time Defines an intensity fade out time Example Store lt Cue gt 5 Out Time 7 Enter Rate Alters recorded time speed attributes for cues board cues or effects Example Store lt Cue gt 5 Rate 5 0 Enter Recall Recalls specific data from a cue preset or beam state used with filters Example Recall lt Cue gt m Enter Sel Store Modifies adds parameter data to a cue preset or beam for specified channels Example Sel Store lt Cue gt 5 Enter Seq Can be used when programming an effect Example Effect 3 Seq 4 Enter bop sedi Can be used when programming an effect Example Effect 3 Set 4
121. Dynamic State Mode OVER Ia Dynamic State Attributes ooooonnccnncnnocinoconoccnonocnnonnncnnncnnnos Storing Dynamic States as Cues Presets oooonoccnocococccnnccnno Sneak Mode Ove vie Wii ad Sneak Mode Valesi encerio riia Sneak Mode Operation oooconcccnonononcnncnonnconnconncanananccnancnna ns Templates Creating Templates tidad From Timing Window oocococcnocnnocinoncnnncnnonnnannncnnninnnos From Touch Sereen cece ceecceseeseeeneecsseceeeeeeeeeeeenees Chapter 9 Special Features Ad Hoc Groups OVELVIEW esoe leh ia Creating Ad Hoc Groups From Keypad odia ke ees From Select Displays oonoconncnnnnnncnnoncnonccnncnnncnnncnnnos From Submasterg iiun a nanii Advanced Control Manual Timing enina trai EEN a aa QUICKEOCUS eeen eaa a TE Oo Data Copy and Move Copy Channelin o EE E a COPY MOVE seen ive ite Sa noe a Function Keys Setting Function Key Option Using Function Keys Store EE Selective Store F 2 cicatrices Update Pci as Selective Recall R Del te FS seis coset eines rata xviii 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 10 Snapshots Macros and Board Cues Snapshots OV EE NIE W iia iii iia 173 Storing SMAPShOtS esses c ceseieassarceeelsessocet ce cedossavedegabecdaces EES sevseandegesa 174 Deleting Snapshots ee eege dake teats adams lees ae sae 176 Recalling Snapshots cisisncce serina Eed EENG 176 Snapshot Dita oi aia 177 Macros OVELVIEW See dee bees halts
122. E VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 266 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 16 02 9668 0001A Show Maintenance This chapter provides instructions for managing show files importing exporting patch data updating the operating system using online diagnostics and for entering the console s off line diagnostic mode e Data Management e Updating Profiles e On Line Diagnostics e Off Line Diagnostics 12 April 01 267 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 268 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE DATA MANAGEMENT 16 Data Management Show File Manager Show files can be opened duplicated renamed deleted and backed up to a Zip disk using the Show File Manager window Only new show files or files resident on the console s hard drive can be opened directly In order to open a show file from either a Zip disk or CD it must first be copied to the console s hard drive Once on the hard drive any show file may be opened modified and then copied back to the Zip drive for back up and storage purposes When the system is powered up the Virtuoso operating system will automatically open the last show file used on the console unless one is unavailable in which case a new show file is automatically opened Open New Show File Step 1 At File menu select Show File Manager Window will open Soave A Copy Step 2 Click New i
123. E COLOR SYSTEM CHARTS 5 Table 5 1 VARIXLITE Color System for VARIXLITE Luminaires Continued Color Name VL Similar VL6 VL7 No To VL2C VL4 VL5 VL5A VL5B VL6B VL7B Orange 183 Lux 19 Match Match Match Match Almost Match Almost Lee 164 Medium Amber 187 Lux 22 Almost Match Match Match Match Match Deep Golden 201 GAM 345 Almost Match Match Match Match 430 Match Amber Canary 205 Lux 21 Almost Match Match Almost Almost Match Light Amber 208 Match Match Match Match Almost Match Lee Orange 212 Lee 105 Match Match Match Match Match Match Chrome Orange 214 Lux 15 Match Match Match Match Match 410 Match Lee 179 Bright Yellow 219 Almost Almost Match Match Match Match Dark Straw 221 Match Match Match Match Match Match Deep Amber 223 Lee 104 Match Match Almost Match Match Light Yellow 225 Lee 101 Almost Match Match Match Match Match Straw 237 Lux 12 Almost Match Match Match Match Light Straw 239 Match Almost Match Match Match Match No Color Green 245 Lee 213 Almost Almost Almost Match Match 370 Match Lee 202 Pale Yellow 251 Match Match Match Green Fern Green 254 Lee 122 Almost Match Match Match Yellow Green 256 Match Match Match Match Lime Green 257 Lee 139 Match Almost Almost Match Match Match Match Primary Green 259 Match Match Match Match Match Light Green 261 Match Match Match Match Match Moss Green 263 Match Match Match Match Match Lt Blue
124. ER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 64 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 4 Select Displays This chapter provides instructions for using the Select Displays feature e General Operation s Beams e Colors e Presets e Groups e Macros Snapshots and Effects 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 65 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 66 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS GENERAL OPERATION A General Operation Fold Out E Overview What are Selects A select is a pre stored or user defined set of parameters presets colors beams selections groups snapshots or events macros effects Selects can be used to simplify channel selection manual control of luminaires cue and effect creation event recall and to ensure consistency of cue parameters throughout the cue list Three select displays are provided on the console front panel and a Select Displays window is provided at the Panels menu for store and recall of Preset Color Beam Group Macro Snapshot and Effect selects Accessing Selects From Keypad Parameters stored into the select banks can also be accessed from the command line keypad Instructions for using the keypad are included in the appropriate sections on storing modifying and recalling Beams Colors Groups etc All storable select items have a discrete number which is used to access the feature from the keypad Selects maintain
125. IRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 40 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL CHANNEL SELECT 3 Channel Select Fold Out C Overview When the patch was defined in Chapter 2 each luminaire was assigned to a control channel Selecting the channel will give you control of the luminaire s parameters in order to build cues or to store as groups of channels If the patch is disabled luminaires must be selected for manual control using their thumbwheel address The procedure for selecting a thumbwheel address is the same as channel selection For example the procedure for selecting channel 301 would be the same as the procedure for selecting thumbwheel 301 Note We recommend using Patch Disabled mode only when VARI KLITE luminaires are present This is not a recommended state for storing cues presets groups etc In addition to the methods of channel selection covered in this section channels can also be selected in the Plan View and 3D Graphic windows However these methods are covered along with the respective topics elsewhere in this manual e For selecting channels via the Plan View window refer to Plan View on page 35 e For selecting channels via the 3D Graphic window refer to Using 3D Graphic Window on page 261 Selecting Channels Channel numbers patch enabled or thumbwheel numbers patch disabled can be selected or deselected from the Channel Select window command l
126. ITE COLOR SYSTEM CHARTS 5 Table 5 2 VARIXLITE Color System for DMX Fixtures Continued 02 9668 0001A VL Similar Color Name No To CYB SSZ PAL Chrome Orange 214 Lux 15 Almost Match Match Lee 179 Bright Yellow 219 Match Match Match Dark Straw 221 Almost Match Deep Amber 223 Lee 104 Almost Almost Match Light Yellow 225 Lee 101 Match Match Match Straw 237 Lux 12 Match Almost Match Light Straw 239 Almost Match No Color Green 245 Lee 213 Almost Match Lee 202 Pale Yellow Green 251 Match Match Fern Green 254 Lee 122 Match Match Match Yellow Green 256 Match Match Lime Green 257 Lee 139 Match Primary Green 259 Match Match Light Green 261 Match Almost Moss Green 263 Match Almost Lt Blue Green 267 Match Almost Match Kelly Green 268 Lux 94 Match Almost Match Dark Green 270 Lee 124 Match Match Match Fluorescent Green 273 Match Almost Dark Fluor Green 275 Match Almost Blue Grass Green 281 GAM 690 Match GAM 440 Medium Blue Green 284 Lee 116 Match Match Dark Peacock Green 286 Match Match Peacock Green 287 Lee 115 Match Match Dark Turquoise 289 Match Almost Match Light Aqua 291 Match Almost Match Aqua 295 Rosco Peacock Blue 298 Lux 73 Almost Match Lee Steel Blue 299 Lee 117 Match Match 1 4 CTB 301 Lee 203 Match Match 1 2 CTB 303 Lee 202 Match Match Lux 61 Full CTB 307 Lee 201 Almost Almost Match City Blue 310
127. P call for details MACINTOSH MONITOR call for details AUXILIARY MONITOR VIDEO CARD The following accessories can be purchased from Vari Lite or on the open market as required Manufacturer Part No Accessory Switchcraft 780 MINI PHONE 141 MONO SHIELDED 2 COND SOLDER PLUG Digi Key SC1057 ND MINI PHONE 141 MONO SHIELDED 2 COND SOLDER PLUG 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 7 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Installation Procedures Connecting Console Computer Components The Virtuoso console system will require inter connection of the console desk and Macintosh G4 computer components Note For more detailed information on Virtuoso system connections refer to the Virtuoso System Installation and Checkout Manual 02 3004 0400 To connect components Step 1 Connect power data cable from primary monitor to first top monitor port at Macintosh computer Connect secondary monitors to additional video ports as required Additional video cards will not be installed unless requested A Caution Set voltage selector switch Macintosh to proper setting Computer Monitor Ca a Channel Select Panel optional E e e ve FireWire e M H To Power Power Cable To Optional H Secondary Monitor Monitor Power Data y f FireWire
128. RACY RELIABILITY OR 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 iii VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY VARI LITE OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE ANY WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU AND NOT VARI LITE OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE 7 Limitation Of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL VARI LITE BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE OR PROFITS OR ANY INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF VARI LITE OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IN NO EVENT SHALL VARI LITE S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES LOSSES AND CAUSES OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE 8 Arbitration Jurisdiction and Venue
129. ROL LUMINAIRE STATUS 3 Parameter Columns Window The Parameter Columns window is used to define which types of information will be displayed in the data window columns Using the cursor select or deselect the boxes as required For Focus and Color two display options are available Focus can be displayed as a single column and or two columns pan and tilt Color can likewise be displayed as a single column and or up to four individual color columns which would provide data for each filter wheel plate mechanism in the luminaire When the single Focus Color box is checked the column will display the Preset Color source as long as the data is being taken from a single Preset Color If not from a single Preset Color then the column would display If Pan Tilt etc are checked then those columns also display the source or 1f set by encoders the numerical values To see both source and tt values select P and V at Luminaire Status window The Quick Set buttons will automatically check the boxes which are applicable to a certain type of luminaire and deselect the others so that no excess columns will be displayed in the window Displays Preset source in single column Displays data for components of Checked boxes will be focus color group columns displayed in window ge L Unters Beem Focus Ll Beam G4 Shutter GA Zoom O Framing EA Forus Edge Oa Edge Prim Frost Eects Wheel Color LJ Effects Indes
130. S Function Select Button Determines function of soft encoders a NX Y Causes selected luminaires to pan tilt until head is pointed in same direction as before XA Y Bhutter Shift Button Makes available additional encoder controls EN Open ee Steps through all QF Pan Tilt on line channels Tilt Encoder Adjusts tilt position of selected luminaire s Pan Encoder Adjusts pan position of selected luminaire s Used with luminaire strobe douser mechanism Intensity State Buttons 4 Applies one of four intensity states 332 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Select Displays Quick Reference Select displays are provided for storing Preset Color Beam Group Macro Snapshot and Effect parameters The parameter data can be recalled with a single press of the appropriate select button for the purpose of building consistent cues Common operations and guidelines for using the select displays Access a different bank within a select display e Press and hold Bank Function button while pressing the buttons labeled 11 through 20 to change banks in increments of 100 Each bank
131. These can be used to access Preset Color Beam Group Macro Snapshot and Effect select functions 20 select buttons labeled 1 through 20 are provided at each display These are used to activate the data stored the selects The last selected item will remain highlighted As a default BEAMS will be selected at the top display COLORS at the middle display and PRESETS at the bottom display Access a different page within a display Press desired page button 1 through 5 at top of select display Access a different bank within a display Press and hold Bank Function button while pressing the buttons labeled 11 through 20 to change banks in increments of 100 Each bank will provide 20 select buttons per page 68 12 April 01 Colors Presets 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS GENERAL OPERATION A Mapping Selects to Different Displays The default function selections can be changed as OS required for any of the three displays H ue aade e At select display press and hold Bank Function
132. This is represented graphically in the following illustration Parameter 1 gt Not Filtered Highlighted t 4 gt Parameter 2 H Filtered Not Highlighted Luminaire Filter Screen console Guidelines e The timing filter is globally applied not individually for each parameter When a parameter is filtered 1ts time is also filtered This is always true except if a Selective Store 1s performed with only time selected In this case you will get all the times for all parameters e Filters affect selective store and selective recall commands refer to Selective Store on page 204 and Selective Recall on page 205 e Filters have no affect on the recall of presets or update commands refer to Update on page 203 e Filters have no affect on the playback of cues unless those filters have been applied to a submaster refer to Function Filter on page 232 e The Filter screen does not have to be visible for selected filters to affect console operation For this reason the touch screen provides an indication that filters are selected by highlighting them in the parameter grids located at the bottom left of the touch screen in the command line display and in the submaster displays 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS FILTER MODE 3 Masking When a filter is applied during a cue store operation values for all parameters ar
133. USER S MANUAL Connecting Additional Components Additional components such as MIDI devices are connected at the console rear panel DX Console Desk Rear Panel Connectors are designated as follows Auxiliary Components Power and Data Ports Channel Select Panel etc Mac Computer Ethernet Port FireWire Port CONSOLE COMM Detail A Mac Computer USB Port USB Device Ports Mouse trackball etc DESK LITE E i gt Deol Y RIGGER MIDI SMPTE_INPUT SERIA o lp Sh Fiber Port Switch Closure MIDI In Thru and SMPTE Input reserved Desk Lamp Trigger Port Out Connections Connection Connector Detail B o Wa Console Power t a Cable Connection A N 10 DMX512 XLR 5 Pin Connectors Corresponds to DMX Universes 1 8 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 1 Installing Desk Lamps Install desk lamps at console rear panel DX Console Desk Rear Panel Desk Lamp Tes Desk Lamp Desk Lamp Connector Connector The brightness of the desk lamps can be adjusted at the console rear panel using the intensity knob USB DESK LITE
134. VANCED PLAYBACK Advanced Playback Stop Flags Steps can contain stop flags which will cause the effect to pause when that step is reached during playback Once paused the submaster will switch from the run mode to the stop step mode The effect will resume playback when Run is pressed again Add stop flag to a step Step 1 At Effect Control press Seq Step 2 Press Sequence Select Button of sequence number you wish to modify Step 3 For step you wish to contain a stop flag press and hold Step Select Button and then press Stop Flag Stop will appear in display Auto Load The Effects select display can be placed in Auto Load mode for automatic submaster loading Once in Auto Load mode when an effect set or sequence is selected at the Effects select display 1t will automatically load into the specified submaster Turn on Auto Load Step 1 At Effects select display press Assign along with submaster Choose to specify submaster for autoload Step 2 When you press an Effect Select Button effect will autoload into submas ter Turn off Auto Load e At Effects select display press Bank Function No A L 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 223 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 224 Run Stop Control The Run and Stop modes are used to start stop and step through an effect when in AutoLoad mode see above These will override any submaster actions when an effect is assigned to a
135. VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL HTP Highest Takes Precedence The principle of Highest Takes Precedence is also important to understand when storing or playing back a cue In a case of intensity conflict e g two selected submasters are set at different levels the HTP principle decides which intensity value will be ultimately applied to the luminaire When storing a cue the stored value is also the result of this determination Each luminaire continuously evaluates the intensity level provided by each submaster including time fades and fader position The subumaster providing the highest intensity level will determine the luminaire s actual intensity level 240 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Playba Select Load Go Back Run 02 9668 0001A ck Advanced Playback of Cues SUBMASTERS PLAYBACK 13 A cue loaded into a submaster becomes the pending cue When Go is pressed the pending cue will play Play a cue Step 1 At keypad press Cue n Enter or scroll through cue list to select cue It will be displayed in the keypad window recall cue 52 52 Blwash Cue 52 Step 2 At required submaster press Select to select submaster for playback function Step 3 Press Load to place cue in pending file as shown in submaster display Step 4 Set Grand Master fader at required level Step 5 Set submaster fader at required level Step 6 Press Go to play cue Play
136. ameter 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS TIMING MODE 3 Speed Speed is the rate of change for any parameter Speed attributes e A speed of zero is a full stop for all luminaires All luminaires operate up to a speed between 200 and 400 e Any luminaire set for a value above its maximum speed will operate at full speed e Rate A Luminaire Type Degrees Per Second Maximum Speed VL2B VL2C 120 200 VL4 240 400 VL5 220 400 VL6 VLM 280 400 VL7 150 400 Timing Mode Operation The Timing screen is used to define an entire timing scheme which can then be sent to selected luminaires using the Timing Enter button The screen window is also used to specify the target of timing entries made at the command line keypad When the Timing mode is selected current timing delay and speed information is displayed within the cell of its associated parameter Guidelines e Pressing the Timing Enter button sends all parameter timing values to selected luminaires whether the parameter is selected highlighted or not e Entries made at the keypad will be sent directly to any parameters selected highlighted in the Timing screen window For example if Color 1 is selected at the Timing screen window and a command line entry such as Time 5 Enter is made then the time value will be sent directly to the Color 1 mechanism of any selected luminaires De se
137. an coins ENEE EEN 331 Manual e eu EE 332 Select Display Sitio ainia 333 Command Line Keypad miii iia aiii 334 O A A E TAA E EEE ER EES EATE T 335 Timing Filter RE ON 336 xxiv 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A INTRODUCTION ABOUT THIS MANUAL Introduction About This Manual This manual provides necessary information regarding product safety installation and operation for the VARIXLITEO Virtuoso DX console It covers the Virtuoso DX console and optional components such as the Channel Select panel AN WARNING Itis important to read ALL accompanying safety and installation instructions to avoid damage to the product and potential injury to yourself or others For assistance in learning to operate the console a tutorial has been included in Appendix A of this manual After completing Chapter 1 Overview and Installation you may want to perform the tutorial if you are not familiar with Virtuoso console operation Chapters 2 8 provide all necessary instructions in order to create a cue effect and play it back Chapters 9 17 provide instructions for advanced features and show file maintenance Additional Documentation Service A service manual for extended maintenance of the Virtuoso DX console is available in both printed and electronic PDF formats a Virtuoso DX Console Service Manual 02 9668 0010 DMX Reference The following VARI LITE reference guides are available in electronic PDF format from the Customer Support page at
138. an effect during a store operation and unless changed by the user the default settings will be stored initially Refer to Basic Effects chapter on page 115 for descriptions of these attributes When an effect is selected the corresponding attribute buttons will light These can be defined at the time of effects creation or changed at a later time Using Effects panel Step 1 At Effects Control press Effects Step 2 At Effects select display press Effect Select Button of effect you wish to modify Step 3 Press buttons for new Direction Mode and Start settings Step 4 Press Store Effect Select Button to store changes Using Effects window Cie Daba Preset Dota Color Palsiir Dala Beant Palette Data ects Step 1 At Data menu select Effects Effects window will open Step 2 Use pop up menus to define new Direction Mode and Start settings for each effect Lf Assign To Submaster Label Set Seq Cycle Start Rand In Out Time Cycles Color C his W 1 Forward Conti p niga L xc eh Figura amp U A Forward Coni nuse Simul 1 00 Z Foreurd Comi nuaya Cipit Effects level timing attributes Defines Set Defines Sequence refer to next section Direction Mode Cycle and Start attributes 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 217 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Effect Timing 218 Overview Timing values can be applied to the overall effect or to a single step of an ef
139. an example 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 293 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Basic Tutorial Create a new show file Refer to Ch 17 for more detailed instructions 1 At File menu select Show File Manager 2 Open new show file by clicking New File icon Shes File Manager New File Icon 3 Enter Name window will open Enter a name for your show file and click OK 4 Program will initialize and return to the Show File Manager window Your show file will now appear in the Active Show File box Close Window by clicking here Active Show Eile estrone ite Your New Show File r Alpe fiia 1ntgleg War allie Wort 5 Close window by clicking box in upper left corner 294 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A mom A Create a Patch Refer to Ch 2 for more detailed instructions 1 At Operation menu select Plan View Plan View window will open and 2D Display menu will become available on menu bar 2 At Patch menu select Enable Editing Icon bar and grid will appear in Plan View window and Patch menu selection will change to Disable Editing Save Editing option will also be activated 3 Import a 2D background picture as follows At File menu select Import 2D Background b At Open window locate Drawing Files folder Q gezu Freier DI preeigg riet WITI 4 17 Select 2D background file K NT Lee El c Select studio_2d dwg and click Choose 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 2
140. annels are already selected If new channels are selected for modification on the keypad this is reflected at the Channel Select panel e Clear functions as a backspace key when used during command line construction Clear is the only thing that clears a syntax error Any other keypad entry is ignored until the error condition is cleared e When working from the command line keypad parameters will assume their new values at full speed unless Manual Timing is currently enabled in which case they will use their current timing values Only when used with the Sneak function can the keypad selections be assigned discrete timing values e Since manual control requires channel selection this can also be done using the command line keypad Refer to Channel Select From Keypad on page 44 select Chan 1 Shortcut gt Holding down Clear will clear an entire unterminated command line 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 57 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Shortcut gt 58 Setting Parameters From Keypad Intensity The keypad can be used to adjust the brightness of the luminaire s beam Intensity responds to a percentage value of 0 100 The At button is used to enter intensity values e lt Chan gt n At m Enter changes the intensity level of the selected channel to m e lt Chan gt n Thru q At m Enter changes the intensity level for the selected range of
141. aster Blackout Setting Intensity Encoder Playback Setting Intensity Level i Grand Master Blackout Setting Playback Intensity Level 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 237 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Example Scenarios The following examples will give you an idea how stored intensity values and fader settings work together to determine an intensity level for playback The final playback intensity level is a percentage of what was stored in the original cue and not a percentage of the luminaire s full potential intensity output Note These simplified examples are intended to help show the relationship of intensity controls Many more combinations are possible Playback Scenario 1 Cue 52 has a stored intensity value of 100 Submaster fader playing Cue 52 is set at 50 Grand Master fader is set at 100 Cue 52 will play back at an intensity level of 50 Playback Scenario 2 Cue 54 has a stored intensity value of 100 Submaster fader playing Cue 54 is set at 50 Grand Master fader is set at 50 Cue 54 will play back at an intensity level of 25 Playback Scenario 3 Cue 56 has a stored intensity value of 50 Submaster fader playing Cue 56 is set at 100 Grand Master fader is set at 100 Cue 56 will play back at an intensity level of 50 Playback Scenario 4 Cue 58 has a stored intensity value of 50 Submaster fader playing Cue 56 is set at 50 Grand Maste
142. atching in 32 set up 26 size 27 snap to grid 27 Playback basic cue 114 intensity affect 237 of cues 241 of effects 135 of macros 241 Point of origin 259 Power down console 19 21 Power up console 19 21 282 Preset data window 85 overview 84 storing and recalling 86 87 88 Preview mode 14 264 Primary console 249 Primary disable 251 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Printing 275 276 Profiles importing 277 updating 278 Programming off line 252 Q QuickFocus operation 162 R RAM erase luminaire 49 Rate dynamic state 151 submaster 231 Recalibration luminiare 49 Reset luminaire 49 Ring physical system 23 Run Stop effect 224 S Secondary console 249 Select display Beams 76 77 78 Colors 82 83 Groups 90 91 overview 67 palette shift button 69 Presets 86 87 88 standard beams 67 standard colors 67 window 71 72 73 working with 68 70 71 72 73 Selective recall function key 167 using 205 Selective store function key 166 using 204 with submasters 207 Sequence creating from panel 127 creating from window 128 definition 117 118 126 timing 221 Set 02 9668 0001A creating from panel 123 creating from window 124 default set 122 definition 117 118 122 Settings console default 245 window 245 246 Show file backup 270 creating new 269 indicator 14 opening 270 printing 275 276 profiles 277 Save A Copy 272 Show File Manager overview 269 Size dynamic state 150 Snap To Grid 27 Snapsho
143. ate this License at any time by destroying the Software and all copies thereof This License will terminate immediately without notice from Vari Lite if you fail to comply with any provision of this License Upon termination you must destroy the Software and all copies thereof 5 Export Control Requirements This License and any technical information supplied during the term of this License is made subject to any restrictions concerning the export of products or technical data from the United States of America which may be imposed upon Vari Lite or you from time to time by the Government of the United States of America Furthermore you agree that at no time either during the term of this License or thereafter will you knowingly export directly or indirectly any United States source technical data acquired from Vari Lite under this License or any direct products of that technical data to any country for which the U S Government or any agency thereof at the time of export requires an export license or other governmental approval without first obtaining that license or approval when required by applicable United States law 6 Limited Warranty Vari Lite warrants the media on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of purchase as evidenced by a copy of your receipt Vari Lite s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replaceme
144. ateusek thoes lob ath alah EE E 50 Console Encoder eege dee dee EE ieee aes 51 Pa a POLES AAS 51 A O Ghee ea eel ieee OS na cae 51 Eo A ee 52 A AE secs T eata eek etapa ea ce ides eben davies A A EEE 52 Image Gobo ii a id 52 MD SAR A AAA AA AN A A AAA e 53 Dynamic EE 53 Frame VL7B Luminaire Only 54 Storing New Default Min Max Settings oocooccconnnonononononcnonananononcnnn non nono nc cnnano nenas 55 Encod rs Muno ei a ee eege ged Ke xiv 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TABLE OF CONTENTS Keypad Control COVER VIE WV ee Eed Ee Ee ee EB i eet 57 Setting Parameters From Keypad 00 cecesscessecseecsseceeeeseeeceecaaecaeeeceaeceeeeeeeeeeeenaees 58 O estos sdeeeab bets geet EE eh 58 PESAS ere EE ee 58 O EE 59 O EE 59 Luminaire Status Luminaire Status Wimdow a a E aea Ea Ere E Aes E AISEE abee ETa 60 Parameter Columns Wimndow 61 Intensity WIN dO Wisin ali dE E 62 Chapter 4 Select Displays General Operation AE 67 What are Selects iii a 67 Accessing Selects From Keypad c oooconoconocinoconoccconoconononcconanancnano nn nono nonnncnnnconnnnnnos 67 Standard Beams and Colors oooonoccnoccconanocnnonnconoconaconncnnn corn cnn cono n cnn crono nccnnccnn cano 67 Panel Select Displays cuota ninio ieia ati 68 Mapping Selects to Different Displays o oooonccnoconocinoccconnnnanonaconn nono ncnnncnnncnnnannos 69 Palette Zorte Butt Ee Eege 69 Applying Selects unid Ee 70 Select Displays Wi E 71 MOTO sionista VE EE 72 A EEN
145. ations Filter grid Se TIMING FILTER DY NAMIC SNE k CU Templates LL LOE S HOEL RW STORE LABEL CLEAR ALL Timing entry Parameter selected when lit Selects entire LINTEN FOCUS COLOR BEAM EDGE coro column of parameters Accesses templates when pressed FILTER DYNAM SNEAK Qm Kal i ie UM E in Strobe Prism Index Speed3 O eee IS E i na al lc E Wi Mode Button 12 April 01 Push to display mode attributes in touch screen Parameter Grid Indicates which parameters are selected All se 3 r Deselects all parameters on screen and clears values Selects al Touch Screen Parameter Group Buttons Allows selection of sate arameters on screen Selects or deselects parameter individual parameters H groups Pressing once selects or dynamic states all pressing again deselects all 336
146. aw data from either lowest active or lowest selected channel as determined by the console s default settings refer to Settings Window on page 245 The lowest active setting draws data from the lowest channel number with intensity of that type regardless of selection The lowest selected setting draws data from the lowest selected channel number of that type regardless of intensity state From Panel Select Displays For all storable items the default label number will move from the middle to the top line of the select display when something has been stored in that select Store a new Beam using Beams select display Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Ensure Beams are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 4 Filter attributes as required using touch screen display in Filter mode 5 Press Store Beam Select Button or Store Label Beam Select Button xxxxxx return Step Note Parameters stored into a Beam select are always determined by the filters refer to Filter Mode on page 146 Store a new Beam using command line keypad Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 3 Filter attributes as required using touch screen display Step 4 Press Store Beam n Enter or Store Beam n Label Enter xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Beam number
147. cates that Colors have been selected Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 10 20 80 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS COLORS A Color Palette Data Window Color data can be viewed in the Color Palette Data window The top portion of the window shows the color list along with all applicable luminaires In addition by selecting a single color and clicking on the Data drop down window button all of its numeric values can be viewed Open Color Palette Data window e At Data menu select Color Palette Data Applicable Luminaires WISH WLR VITE Cyber Color Number Data Drop Down Window Displays data for selected Color 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 81 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 82 Storing and Recalling Colors Note Beams and colors are global settings by luminaire type The console will draw data from either lowest active or lowest selected channel as determined by the console s default settings refer to Settings Window on page 245 The lowest active setting draws data from the lowest channel number with intensity of that type regardless of selection The lowest selected setting draws data from the lowest selected channel number of that type regardless of intensity state From Panel Select Displays Store a new color using Colors select display Step 1 Ensure color you wish to store is displayed in lowest active lum
148. cation which will not excuse your indemnity obligations 11 Complete Agreement This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements written or oral regarding such subject matter 12 Miscellaneous If any provision of this License shall be unlawful void or for any reason unenforceable then that provision shall be deemed severable or reformable if necessary and shall not affect the validity and enforceability of any remaining provisions Alternatively such provision may also be modified to the extent necessary for its validity 13 Transfer This License may be transferred to another party provided the other party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License and you notify Vari Lite of the transfer in writing 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 02 9668 0001A How To OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE How To Obtain Warranty Service A copy of the Vari Lite Inc Limited Warranty was included in the shipping package for this VARI XLITE product To obtain warranty service please contact customer service at 1 877 VARI LITE 1 877 827 4548 or customerservice vari lite com and request a Return Material Authorization RMA for warranty service You need to provide the model and serial number of the item being returned a description of the problem or failure and the name of the registere
149. cess to console naming and software version information It also displays the offline indicator when the system is running in offline mode refer to Off Line Programming on page 252 To open System Configuration window select System Config at Setup menu Double click icon to open Versions window for naming fm Number indicates how many consoles have been used to open the file Dot indicates Primary console Bold indicates this console console you are operating on Unique console name The window displays and keeps track of the following information e Console hardware ID number A unique ID number will be generated for each console that opens a single show file When a new show file is created the console ID number will always be 1 one 20 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH POWER UP VARI LITE SYSTEMS 2 Power Up VARIXLITE Systems Powering Up Console Once your Virtuoso DX console has been connected to the system you will need to power up the console and verify status of the connected devices The System Configuration window displays each device s thumbwheel address which can then be used to patch your system To power up console and verify system connections Step 1 At rear of console set power switch to ON position Step 2 At Macintosh computer press power button Step 3 Wait for console panels to initialize and Virtuoso application to launch A new show fil
150. ch Step 2 Press and hold Reset top left corner of console while turning on power switch Console will power up in diagnostic mode Power Switch To use diagnostics e To execute a test or function press Bank Function along with corresponding bank button of test select buttons 1 7 e For Display Test press any key five times to cycle through intensity levels and return to starting state e While in diagnostic mode turning encoders and moving faders will register values in Submasters display window 282 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER LI Show Control by External Devices This chapter provides instructions for controlling shows by use of an external MIDI SMPTE or switch closure trigger device e Concepts e MIDI Notes e MIDI SMPTE Timecode 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 283 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 284 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW CONTROL BY EXTERNAL DEVICES CONCEPTS 17 Concepts About MIDI SMPTE The console is able to accept two forms of external control e MIDI Notes e Timecode includes both MIDI and SMPTE MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a communication protocol that allows electronic musical instruments to interact with each other Much in the same way that two computers communicate via modems two electronic instruments can communicate via MIDI At its most basic structure MIDI information tells a synthes
151. clauses of the following standards and harmonized documents Safety EN 60950 1999 Safety Standard for Information Technology Equipment EMC EN55022A 1998 Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN50082 1 1997 Generic Immunity Standard We certify that VARIXLITE products conform to the protection requirements of European council directives 73 23 EEC LVD and 89 336 EEC EMC 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SAFETY NOTICE Safety Notice It is extremely important to read ALL safety information and instructions provided in this manual and any accompanying documentation before installing and operating the products described herein Heed all cautions and warnings during installation and use of this product Safety symbols used throughout this manual are as follows A CAUTION advising of potential damage to product A WARNING advising of potential injury or death to persons GENERAL INFORMATION PERTAINING TO PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK WARNING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE 1 Replace fuses with same type and rating only WARNING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRICAL SHOCK 1 VARIXLITEO control consoles are designed for dry locations only Exposure to rain or moisture may damage the console 2 Disconnect power before servicing any VARIXLITEO equipment 3 Servicing to be performed by qualified personnel only WARNING RF INTERFERENCE 1 This is a Class A product In
152. con button to launch a new show file e iria g t Aw Vie impet yenit tipan_ run kidule import Prafiles gd abe Troftes Duplicate selected show file Rename Import Show Data from selected show file Delete selected selected show file show file Eject Disk Open new show file Open selected nn a show file p j Show File Copy selected file to Zip drive or to console hard drive so it can be opened 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 269 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Open Existing Show File Note To open a show file from a portable disk you must first copy it to the console s hard drive Step 1 At File menu select Show File Manager Window will open Step 2 Open show file e For show files resident on console s hard drive Seve A Copy files listed in left column select required show ia file and click Open icon button to launch New Vera linpert Venus e For show files stored on a portable disk available mc EE in right column select file and click left arrow Heatley button to copy to console s hard drive It will now be listed in left column Select show file and click Open icon button to launch Rename Duplicate or Delete Show File Only show files resident on the console s hard drive can be renamed duplicated or deleted Step 1 At File menu select Show File Manager Step 2 Select required show file Step 3 Click Rename Duplicate or ae date lidia
153. console name 23 250 overview 20 22 physical ring 23 12 April 01 323 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL storing 24 updating 24 Console default settings 245 desk 6 installation 8 10 11 log 14 274 Mac computer 6 overview 5 power down 19 21 power up 19 21 282 Console ID number 20 23 Conventional fixture patching 28 Copy channel 164 Copy Move function key 168 using 165 Cue affect of faders on 198 207 as an effect 134 data window 212 definition 109 deleting 113 Enable editing option 212 filters 148 linking 194 242 looping 195 out time 197 setting intensity state 111 sheet 209 storing 110 112 wait time 196 Cycle 221 D Delay 144 145 Delete function key 167 Device Info window using 49 Diagnostics DMX channel 279 Error log 280 off line 281 282 Direction effect 119 Display filter 3D 262 channel 248 DMX fixture channel test 279 324 patching 28 Setup window 279 VL color system for 102 Drawing Size window 27 Dynamic state as cue preset 152 attributes 150 encoder 50 53 overview 150 E Effect attack time 221 attributes 119 autoload 223 background state 129 break 120 cascade 121 changing modes 217 continuous 120 creating from keypad 131 creating from panel 132 cycle 120 221 decay time 221 definition 117 118 direction 119 fade in time 219 fade out time 219 forward 119 mode 120 oscillate 119 overview 92 117 118 random 119 reverse 119 Run Stop
154. continue clicking on buttons of channel numbers you wish to add selections pile on Example To select channel 521 ensure that 1000 button is not active click the page 500 button and then click 21 on the 100 button array Select a range of channels Step 1 Using cursor click 1000 as required Step 2 Click 0 through 900 as required Button will light Step 3 Click button of first channel number to be selected Then while holding mouse button drag across range of channels 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL CHANNEL SELECT 3 Select channels on multiple pages Step 1 Using cursor click 1000 as required Step 2 Click 0 through 900 as required Button will light Step 3 Select required channels 4 Step 4 Click on next required page 0 through 900 First page button will be dimly highlighted to show that channels are selected on that page Step 5 Select required channels on new page Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required Deselect channels e Press any selected channel button s to deselect Special Buttons Six buttons are available in the Channel Select window for simplifying channel selection CLR a CER clears all channel selections e ALL selects all patched channels e INV Invert deselects currently selected channels and selects all other patched INV ACT channels e ACT selects all channels with active luminaires e MAR selec
155. control panel the three selects will display Effects Sets and Sequences Effects Edit Controls O uecca Bank Function Effects Control TT Direction Mode g O Lae je 1 pa E CO LC Lo La Start Effects Windows Three effects windows are also available These can be used alone or in combination with the Effects Control panel to create and edit effects Cue Data Preset Deia Color Pie te Data Effects windows Effects e Sets Toggle Maka Leitzeg e Sequences 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS EFFECTS CONCEPTS 7 Direction Mode and Start Direction Mode and Start attributes determine how the sequence steps are to be applied to the set parts These are used in combination to provide different executions of set parts Direction Direction determines which direction the sequence steps run Forward Fwd The sequence steps will run forward Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 etc Fwd and then start over when the last step is reached
156. control channels Groups may be selected from the Group Select portion of the Channel Select panel or from the command line keypad A function of the Select Displays which allows channels to be stored and recalled as groups Restarts luminaires and reloads operating system and cue data The subjective appreciation of the dominant wavelength of a light source the attribute of color perception by which different parts of the spectrum are distinguished red orange yellow green blue violet purple Highest Takes Precedence During intensity conflicts this setting causes luminaires to assume the intensity value of the selected channel having the highest value A luminaire state programmed via the Out button in which no recorded data is provided for that luminaire in a selected cue When a luminaire is inactive or out it will not store data for any parameter A submaster mode which prohibits the associated submaster s contents from being altered by any other active submaster Releasing the submaster from its independent state makes the associated channels parameters available to other control Those channels will respond to the next available instruction for which it has stored data The intensity levels for channels on independent submasters are affected by the setting of the Grand Master fader Example Press and hold Ind while pressing Choose of required submaster Changes orientation of rotating gobo The amount of light
157. crete Color number Note Channels that are selected during a color recall that have no value for that color will remain in their current state From Select Displays Window When storing or modifying Colors from the Select Displays first select channels to be stored in the Color select refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 To store label update delete and recall Colors refer to the procedures given in Select Displays Window on page 71 From Keypad Store a new Color Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual controls set all required parameters Color Step 3 Press Store Color n Enter or Store Color n Label Enter El xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Color number Delete a Color Delete e Delete Color n Enter The display will now show this as an empty Color Note This action will delete color information for all types stored Recall a Color Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels that have data stored in that Color will be affected Step 2 Press Color n Enter where n is the discrete Color number 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 83 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Presets 84 Overview Preset selects are used to store specific luminaire parameters for the purpose of building cues Typically a Preset will contain focus pan tilt information only but with the Virtuoso console any desired parameter incl
158. d WHEEL SPIN max stop Beam Beam can be controlled by the soft encoders when Beam is selected These knobs can be used to set all the parameters associated with a luminaire s beam The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 BEAM open close Encoder 2 EDGE hard soft Encoder 3 ZOOM large small Encoder 4 STROBE max stop Encoder 5 PRISM in out Encoder 6 FROST in out Image Gobo Images can be controlled by the soft encoders when Image is selected These knobs can be used to access the gobo effects and prism features of a luminaire The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 GOBO open other w Shift button pressed WHEEL SPIN max stop Encoder 2 ROTATING GOBO open other w Shift button pressed ROTATING SPIN max stop Encoder 3 INDEX open other w Shift button pressed ROTATE max stop Encoder 4 EFFECTS WHEEL open other w Shift button pressed EFFECTS SPIN max stop 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL ENCODER CONTROL 3 Encoder 3 EFFECTS INDEX open other w Shift button pressed EFFECTS ROTATE max stop Encoder 6 EDGE hard soft w Shift button pressed ZOOM large small 3D 3D parameters can be controlled by the soft encoders when 3d is selected These knobs can be used to adjust X Y and Z coordinates of the luminaire The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 X min max Encoder
159. d Click OK Channels 1 5 are now stored as a Group 1 for future recall 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 299 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Select group and apply intensity and color 1 To deselect group for purposes of this tutorial click somewhere inside 3D Graphic window Luminaires will now be deselected turning from orange back to gray 2 At Panels menu choose Select Displays Select Displays window will open 3 At Group section of window click inside Group 1 box Luminaires will now be highlighted again in 3D Graphic window Group Section Click inside box 1 to select Group 1 Ensure Select mode CTE iS acti p SS E Ce E WE EE ER E Ts 4 At Panels menu select Encoders 5 Encoders window will open Using cursor click Full to bring intensity to full 100 Beams will now appear in 3D Graphic window 6 At Select Displays window at Color section click inside Color 4 box Beams will now have Click to bring color in 3D Graphic window luminaires to full intensity Color Section Click inside box 4 to select color Ensure Select mode is active 300 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Store two presets 1 Store Preset 1 as follows a At Encoder window with Focus selected use Pan and Tilt encoders to move luminaires to new position Pan and Tilt lt b Press F1 Store window will open Encoders c Using cursor select Preset Or pr
160. d Cue recording 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES MACROS 10 Macros Data Window The Macros window can be used to view macro information and to edit macro timing The macro Delete Replace Punch In and Insert features allow macro editing so that an entire macro does not have to be re recorded in order to make a change Access Macros window Step 1 At Data menu select Macros Macros window will open Cue Date Preset Data Color Pie De Dala Step 2 If timing is required click in T column A dot will appear in column indicating that timing will be used when playing back macro Timing can be turned off at a later time by clicking in the T column again Toggle Maila Lite Step 3 If required click arrow at left of Steps to open Steps drop down window Edit times as required Indicates that timing is active for the macro Macro Number Punch In Delete A Select Susmester 1 Replace Loed Submaster 1 Pa Go Submester 1 Insert Select Submaster 2 Logg Jubmaster Z Timing information This can be edited Delete a step Step 1 Using trackpad select step s to be deleted Step 2 Click on trash can icon Step s will be removed 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 181 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Replace a step Step 1 Using trackpad select step to be replaced Step 2 Click replace icon Console Macro Rec button will begin flashing S
161. d be E different e F Store new min max settings Step 1 Press button for required set of soft encoder functions It will be mapped to soft encoders Step 2 Select luminaires to be included in min max setting For example select some VL6 luminaires Step 3 Using encoders adjust parameter for new setting Step 4 Press Store Encoder Min Max Button Setting is now stored for those channels Add new channels to a setting Step 1 Select luminaires to be added to setting For example select additional VL6 luminaires Step 2 Press Store Encoder Min Max Button Setting is now stored for new luminaires as well as previously stored luminaires 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 55 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 56 Encoders Window The Encoders window functions just as the panel encoders to provide incremental control of luminaire parameters In addition it provides a visible display of currently selected cue or effect and allows specification of a submaster for cue tracking Refer to the function explanations in the section Console Encoders on page 51 for more in depth information on each encoder function and the associated min max settings To operate the window controls e At Panels menu choose Encoders to open window e At popup menu select encoder function Focus Color Beam Image Dynamic or F
162. d to store additional parts into set Channels can only be used once in a set Set Part pull down window control Channel Field Clears a selected part a Loads channels sequentially across a range of parts Loads channels Adds channels Removes channels interlaced across to selected part from selected part a range of parts Randomly distributes channels across a range of parts 124 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS CREATING EFFECTS 7 Load channels into a range of parts Using cursor and keyboard shift select multiple parts b At channel fields type in a range of channels c Click Seq to load sequentially click Int to load interlaced or click Rnd to load randomly refer to Interlace Sequential and Random on page 122 Step 4 Using keyboard label set as required Delete a part Step 1 Select Part you wish to delete Step 2 Click Clear button 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 125 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Creating Sequences Sequences can be created using the Effects Control panel or Sequences window Once you have some sequences these can be used in combination with sets to create effects A sequence consists of one or more steps Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Step1 Step2 Step3 Step 4 Step1 Step2 Step3 Step 4 Etc Steps may contain either a single cue or up to three parameters in any combination of the f
163. d user or organization If available you should have your sales invoice to establish the date of sale as the beginning of the warranty period Once you obtain the RMA pack the product in its original packing material along with a copy of your invoice if available and write the RMA number legibly on or near the shipping address label Return the unit freight prepaid to Vari Lite Inc 201 Regal Row Dallas TX 75247 Attention Warranty Service As stated in the warranty it is required that the shipment be insured and FOB our service center 12 April 01 v VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL vi FCC LE Compliance Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with Vari Lite system service and safety guidelines may cause harmful interference to radio communica tions Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful inter ference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense Declaration of Conformity We declare under our sole responsibility that this product complies with the relevant
164. directly to a selected parameter Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At touch screen select a parameter with hard or soft buttons Step 3 At keypad press Time Delay or Speed as required followed by time value and then Enter Time value will appear in cell of selected parameter at touch screen and be sent directly to selected channels FILTERS Using filters while storing cues Step 1 Set filters as required When filters are selected high lighted the associated parameters will be the only parame ters stored during any subsequent cue store operations When filters are deselected not highlighted the associated param eters will not be stored during any subsequent cue store oper ations Step 2 Press filter To Cue The filter state will be applied to all cues stored from this point on until changed Step 3 Store cue as usual 02 9668 0001A Time Format Time is entered at the keypad in minutes and seconds seconds or seconds and tenths of seconds Max time 59 59 Examples 2 5 25 0 25 sec 2 5 2 05 2 min 5 sec III J 3 1 3 1 3 sec 5 5 1 2 sec Speed Format Speed is entered at the keypad in degrees per second Luminaire Rate VL2 120 VL4 240 VL5 220 VL6 VLM 280 VL7 150 Max Speed 200 400 400 400 REFERENCE FOLD OUTS Window Select tab to change window mode Displays template name Template oper
165. doW sseseesseeesseseeesersrsressesresresestssserttstessestesreetesresrestsstt 20 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xiii VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Power Up VARIXLITE Systems Powermg Up Consoles A aii 21 Powering Down opgoe eeeee eebe dees eege eer tdt push a e 21 System Configuration Window oooocccococcconnnonnnonnnonoconannnnnnnnonncnnnnconc crec nnrnn cra nro nana nano 22 Console Naihi tt 23 Store Commerce Sate ee 24 Update Configuration eiaeaen iria Esiri EEN eaa 24 Patch UA A EE ed E O ON 25 Setting Up Plan View Wimdouw noc nccnnncnnnrnnnrna non nccn neones 26 Plan View Background Picture 27 Patching DMX Conventional Fixtures 00 0 0 eee esceeeccesecsseceseceseceeeeeeeceeseneeeneeeneeenaens 28 Patching VARI LITE Lummares eee eeeeccseeeceeeesceeseeseeeceaeeaesaeeeeseneesecaeceeeeees 32 Patch Editing Editing Wee ged A i 35 Plan Vi Wise diari 35 Path A A Aia 36 2D 3D Mode Guidelines eebe Eesebuer ed EE 37 Chapter 3 Manual Control Channel Select A OT NON 41 Selecting Chanel are ebe AA A EE 41 From Channel Select Window ocooooooonnccnnonononononononononnnnnoncononanonononnononannananncnnonns 42 From Keypad BET 44 From Channel Select Panel Optional Accesggorg 45 Console Channel Select Buttons 47 Nextlrand Kette Rehn Eed stoves Dd 47 Lamp Control A O oe SEL SUSE OR Lanka 48 A 48 Reset Recalibration Erase Luminaire Data 49 Encoder Control DE ATATA AET E tacSea nel tebeasdovaneel ceed eb
166. dow will open Step 2 Click Reset or Recalibrate as required Te Dhami beet El Charat 3 Cried SZ Lob 1 54 Pet Wiere Ferus 5500 Raptor Tbkapkekegt 177 Part 3 Reset Recaiorate eae Gor 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 49 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Encoder Control Fold Out D Overview The manual control encoders or knobs provide incremental control of luminaire parameters Pan tilt and intensity are provided with permanently assigned encoders while the remaining parameters are mapped to soft encoders The soft encoders control a variety of luminaire parameters depending on which function is currently selected A display associated with each soft encoder indicates its selected function Soft encoder functions e Color controls color functions such as CMY RGB wheels flags or color plates e Beam controls edge beam zoom frost strobe and prism e Image controls static gobo rotating S J gobo spin and effects i e 3d routes X Y and Z coordinates for pan and tilt e Dynamics modifies rate size and orientation of dynamic states Frame controls framing shutters es By selecting a function the soft encoders change to control the parameters of that aa function In addition to the encoder ee
167. dow will open Click Save 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 297 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Set up 3D Graphic window Refer to Ch 16 for more detailed instructions 1 Import a venue as follows a At File menu select Import Venue b At Open window locate Drawing Files folder c Select studio_3d dwg and click Choose Aroa Select 3D eng graphic file d Import Options window will open Select inches or cm and click OK 2 At Operation menu select 3D Graphic 3D Graphic window will open Venue graphic will be visible and your patched luminaires will appear on truss 298 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A wona A Select channels and store as a group Refer to Ch 3 and Ch 4 for more detailed instructions 1 At Panels menu select Channel Select Clear All Selections Select All Patched Channels Click boxes to sa fav ee a va es e ee am 1020 select channels oof 21 22 23 24 25 26 77 20 70 Lan highlighted boxes bz z az 3354 as 38 ar 55 a P are selected AF 1450 14 as ae a a lao So 2 At Channel Select window using cursor select channels 1 5 by clicking inside appropriate boxes Channel selections will also appear highlighted in 3D Graphic window Selected Channels Luminaires 3 Store channels 1 5 as a group Press F1 Store window will open b Using cursor select Group Or press G at key board c Enter 1 for the group number
168. e or last open Ber show file will automatically open and System Con figuration window will open within the show file Step 4 Verify that your lighting system devices appear in System Configuration window this verifies that data communication is present Refer to System Configuration Window on page 22 If any devices are not present check system connections and power Step 5 Once everything is verified as online store configuration Refer to Store Configuration on page 24 Powering Down Console When powering down the console for storage or in the event a restart is required use the following procedure To power down console Step 1 At Virtuoso menu select Shut Down Step 2 Atrear of console set power switch to OFF position 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 21 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL System Configuration Window When in a VARI LITE environment the System Configuration Config window is a representation of your physical system of consoles NIF units VARI LITE luminaires and interface devices A i e UDM unit SPC 36 interface The window is associated with a specific show file so that you can keep track of system information based on each show To open System Configuration window select System Config at Setup menu Indicates a break in the ring Displays by Channel or Thumbwheel Addresses displayed in red indicate Thumbwheel Physical ring that device i
169. e stored although some have been excluded from playback filtered This method of filtering utilized by the Virtuoso console is called masking It is important to keep this concept in mind when storing cues with filters because during some playback situations the values which were masked can intentionally or unintentionally be recalled This situation can occur when a filter or mask has been applied to a cue and a second filter is applied to the submaster which is playing back that particular cue Refer to Function Filter on page 232 for information on playing back cues which have stored masks Filter Mode Button Push to display filters in touch screen C TIMING UN Ma Sait FILTER AAA DYNAM O SNEAK l I C CECCO CC Parameter Grid SS Din O 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 147 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 148 Filter Mode Operation When the Filter mode is accessed by default all parameters are selected not filtered Change filtering for parameters as follows e To prohibit the store or recall of all attributes of a parameter use the button located just below the screen to deselect all e To prohibit the store or recall of one attribute of a parameter zoom for example select the appropriate cell on the sc
170. e A white unfilled circle indicates that the luminaire can almost match the color e A blank cell indicates that the color is unattainable by the luminaire Colors achieved initially through the VL color system can also be stored in the Color select palette refer to Storing and Recalling Colors on page 82 Open VARIXLITE Color System window e At Operation menu select VL Color System oparata Cue theet Beard Cue Meret Note Color matching for DMX fixtures is done by fixture type Petar an e g CYB for Cyberlight fixtures in all modes etc eg leger Snapshot Aiter Sorts list by gel number Sorts list by VL ID number Luminaire compatibility CG EE Wr la Sorts list by Dark E d color name Light Red Dar E Ora rape Orange Feu Arer Deep Gohier Geary Sends color selection DEES to luminaires Lee range a SG Gg eg wa CG Responds to keyboard Currently selected list will respond to entries made at the Macintosh Enter key presses keyboard For example while sorted by Gel typing in G840 at the keyboard will highlight this color in the window Subsequently pressing the keyboard s Enter key will send the color to selected luminaires 96 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM APPLYING VARI LITE COLORS 5 Send colors using window only Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using cursor select color choice Step 3 Click Send button or just double click on color choice Luminai
171. e Editing Rate 316 A luminaire state in which no recorded data is provided for that luminaire in a selected cue When a luminaire is out it will not store any parameter data When a cue is recalled an out or inactive luminaire will not change parameter positions but if pre viously active it will fade out with either the cue time or the console s default time A cue attribute that defines the intensity fade out time of any luminaires which are active at the point of cue playback but which are inactive in the cue being played back and are not included in any other active cue Out Time will also define the intensity fade out time in the event the submaster is de selected A number of selects available in each bank of group beam color preset macro template and effect selects A luminaire state in which it will not respond to any manual or playback commands nor will it store into any cues A component of an effect set Parts are made up of specified channels luminaire groups with the limitation that a channel may only appear once within the set The mechanism by which thumbwheel addresses luminaire and interfaces are assigned to channel numbers Any number of conventional thumbwheels may be patched to a single control channel Also see Channel A set of programmed parameters which can be applied to selected channels using the Preset select display or command line keypad All luminaire parameter attributes including timi
172. e effect is in Break Mode and the attack and sustain times are longer than the total step time Step 1 Step 2 lt lt Step Time Ga Step Time gt Attack Sustain A gt Attack s stal Decay Background State 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 221 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL O Effects 222 Assigning Sequence Level Timing From Select Displays Assign sequence level times Step 1 At Effects panel press Effects Step 2 At Effects select display press Effect Select Button of effect you wish to modify Step 3 At Sequence select display press Sequence Select Button of sequence you wish to modify Step 4 Using encoders set timing values To scale timing values for all steps in sequence press Shift while adjusting encoder To set all steps to same value turn encoder to 0 00 and then up to desired value Note Holding down the timing button and turning the encoder knob at the same time will change the time for all steps in the sequence From Effects Window Assign Step Attack Sustain and Decay times Step 1 At Data menu select Sequences Sequences window will open Step 2 Using cursor and keyboard enter timing information as required 12 April 01 Cue Daba Preset Deia Color Pale fie Data Beam Palette Data fiert Sub AE Snape hits Jame cada Scripti loggie Mal dilo 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED EFFECTS FEATURES AD
173. e is used for preview editing While the Preview button is selected any manual control actions are stored to the appropriate luminaires but are not executed on stage Refer to Live Preview Mode on page 264 for complete instructions on this feature Log Messages Messages highlighting in the Log Message box are the same messages collected in the Console Log refer to Console Log on page 274 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION ROUTINE CARE AND MAINTENANCE 1 Routine Care and Maintenance Fiber Optic Connectors In some cases data measured in microns is broadcast from the console to the system by use of fiber optic cables Since the surface area of these cable connectors is very small special care must be taken to ensure fiber optic cleanliness The slightest dust scratch or liquid film residue in contact with the data transmission portion of the connector can result in loss of data integrity To maintain connector cleanliness e Always cap ends of all connectors when cables are not terminated If cap is not available tape a small piece of clean paper over end of cable do not jam paper into the connector e Protect connector cap from dust dirt and moisture as much as possible Special precision connectors are utilized to ensure proper cable alignment and maximize protection for the exposed fiber optic cable ends As a result cleaning of the connector and fiber optic ends should not normall
174. ease call 1 877 VARI LITE for most recent list of compatible video cards 6 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION CONSOLE OVERVIEW 1 Monitor Power Button Disable Modification so that their power button is disabled It has been discovered that there is a design defect for this product where the button can be remotely activated by cellular phone activity resulting in shutdown of the Macintosh computer system during console operation The following sticker applied to the back of the monitor indicates whether the power button has been disabled Some Macintosh monitors shipped with the Virtuoso DX console have been modified THE POWER BUTTON ON THIS MONITOR HAS BEEN DISABLED SEE VIRTUOSO DX USERS MANUAL FOR DETAILS Channel Select Panel Optional The Virtuoso DX console supports an outboard Channel Select panel which allows instantaneous selection and visible display of up to 2000 channels This component is optional and is not required for console operation Accessories List The following accessories and or replacement items can be ordered directly from Vari Lite Please order by Vari Lite part number Vari Lite Part No Accessory 10 9668 0130 CONSOLE DUST COVER 20 9625 0142 CONSOLE ROAD CASE 20 9625 0143 MACINTOSH COMPUTER ROAD CASE 21 9668 0005 CHANNEL SELECT PANEL 52 6616 0780 MINI PHONE 141 MONO SHIELDED 2 COND SOLDER PLUG 71 5001 0003 GOOSENECK HI INTENSITY DESK LAM
175. ected channel to m e lt Chan gt n Thru q At m Enter changes the intensity level for the selected range of channels to m The Full button is used to quickly set intensity to 100 Full e lt Chan gt n Full Enter changes the intensity level of the selected channel to 100 Fader Levels Since the intensity level plays a large part in storing cues 1t is important to note that intensity levels stored in a cue are calculated after the contribution of the Grand Master fader Black Out button and any selected submasters faders not before To simplify the storing of basic cues ensure that all faders are set at full 100 and the Black Out button is not engaged 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 111 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Storing Note When Store is pressed the keypad defaults to Cue mode Therefore the lt Cue gt button press is noted as optional Store a basic cue Step 1 Using manual controls set luminaires in desired stage look Step 2 Ensure that luminaires are in required intensity state refer to Intensity States on page 110 Step 3 Press Store lt Cue gt n Enter current stage look will be stored as specified cue number n Store a basic cue with a label When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Step 1 Using manual controls set luminaires in desired stage
176. ed for preview editing While the Preview button is selected any manual control actions or event recalls are stored to the appropriate luminaires but are not executed on stage They are however visible in the 3D Graphic and Luminaire Status windows An indication of the current mode is displayed just above the button bar at the bottom of the online display screen Live Preview Mode Indicator Console 1 On Line Guidelines e The submasters are not affected by the Live or Preview Mode selection e Any active events on a submaster will still execute normally when Preview is selected 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 3D GRAPHIC DISPLAY LiVE PREVIEW MODE 15 Using Preview Mode This feature will allow you to continue to play back a show while setting up a new look which can then be saved as a cue The Preview Mode would also allow you to step through the Cue Sheet in order to preview cues in the 3D Graphic or Luminaire Status windows To use Preview Mode eB Step 1 Press Preview Any events currently active in a submaster will continue to View execute Step 2 Open 3D Graphic window and or Luminaire Status windows as required Step 3 Select channels Step 4 Make manual control changes or step through the Cue Sheet Actions will be reflected in 3D Graphic and Luminaire Status windows Step 5 If required store changes as a cue Step 6 Press Live to return to Live Mode 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 265 VARI LIT
177. ed to halt the automatic playback of linked cues which have an associated wait or trail time Stop countdown of wait times Step 1 Press Stop Step to stop countdown Step 2 Press Run to continue the countdown or press Go to advance to the next cue Fade Times for Marked Zero Out Cues During playback cues stored with intensity states other than active will assume different fade out times depending on the state e Cues with marked and zero instructions will use the intensity down time associated with the channel e Cues with an out inactive state instruction will follow the out time associated with the cue 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 14 System Setups This chapter provides instructions for setting the console s default options display settings and multi console system options e Default Options e Display Filters e Multi Console Features e Off Line Programming 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 243 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 244 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SYSTEM SETUPS DEFAULT OPTIONS 14 Default Options Settings Window The options available in the Settings window are advanced setups that are not required when first powering up and patching your system These can be changed at any time To change settings e At Setup menu select Settings Settings window will open Tells the luminaires what to do in the event communication is lost
178. ed to the hard drive To save a copy Step 1 At File menu select Save A Copy Save As window will open Step 2 Name your file or use default name Cinar 20 Rack greand 4 Pe E Step 3 Click Save impart Venue Import Meier limpan Prais Vadabe Frutiles Type a name or use the default Current Show File Show 3 IW Save Garrard She File As Export Patch Patch data can be exported as text information from a show file for import into other show files or programs To export patch data Step 1 At Patch menu select Export Patch File management window will open urn Pato DE Enable Editing lave 8 gising Step 2 Select a location and name your patch file Step 3 Click Save Imker P 272 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW MAINTENANCE DATA MANAGEMENT 16 Import Patch Patch data exported from a show file may be imported into a different show file The patch data file can be resident on the hard drive or portable disk Note The Import Patch option will only be available when patch Enable Editing is selected To import patch data Turn Falc 00 Step 1 At Patch menu select Enable Editing Step 2 At Patch menu select Import Patch File management window will open Step 3 Locate and select required file Step 4 Click Choose Teen Paboh HT Disable ding fave Editing impon Paita Export Patch Pan Miles ER Note For instructions on importing a 3D venue
179. editing is disabled If you wish to edit data select this option Menu will now read Disable Cue Editing Step 3 Edit data according to guidelines in Cue Editing on page 213 Step 4 Click Save Cue to save changes or click Revert to abort Step 5 To protect window from editing select Disable Cue Editing Timing Displays parameter timing information Opens Parameter Columns window which is used to choose which columns appear in Cue window Value Specifies that window ee Cue for which data will reflect cue selections Displays value that luminaire is is being displayed made at keypad when reporting for the parameters checked Parameter Source Palette reference reported by luminaire last one recalled for that parameter Saves editing changes only available when editing is Enabled Dynamic Displays dynamic state data Saves editing changes i only available when editing is Enabled Reverts to last saved values Scrolls through cue list only available when editing is Enabled Refer to Parameter Columns Window on page 61 212 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES CUE WINDOWS 11 Cue Editing Cue data can be edited in the Cue Data window when editing is Enabled Remember to click Save Cue to save changes or click Revert to abort changes and reload last saved version of cue Editing specific lines e When editing a specific line of a cell standard Macintosh text co
180. efer to Colors on page 80 Examples e lt Chan gt n Color m Enter applies color m to the selected channel n where m is the discrete color number e lt Chan gt n Thru q Color m Enter applies color m to the selected range of channels where m is the discrete color number Note Colors from the VARI XLITE Color System can also be applied using the keypad s VL Color button Refer to Applying VARI LITE Colors on page 96 for instructions Beams The keypad can be used to assign beams to selected luminaires The beam entered on the keypad corresponds to the beam state saved in that particular beam select refer to Beams on page 74 Examples e lt Chan gt n Beam m Enter applies beam state m to the selected channel n where m is the discrete beam number e lt Chan gt n Thru q Beam m Enter applies beam state m to the selected range of channels where m is the discrete beam number Note If a profile does not provide default color and beam data then there will be no change for selected channels until custom color and beam selects are stored 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 59 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Luminaire Status 60 Refer to Fold Out C Luminaire Status Window The Luminaire Status window can be used to view current H 1 1 Cue Sheri luminaire data as a numeric value or preset reference The Sees gees window is
181. elect where a show file back up is being made or other action is occurring where the CIC is not immediately available for changes 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 13 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Live Pre View 14 s U Unknown state where the CIC is no longer responding e No CIC reply where the CIC is not available or ready NL Net Listen where the console checks for other active consoles on the network e ML Mac Listen where the CIC checks for a local Mac Not usually displayed e D Secondary console e SP Secondary Prep where the secondary console syncs the show file and saves it to disk e SL Secondary Load where the secondary console loads the show file to the CIC e WP Waiting for Primary appears while the Waiting For Primary Dialog is open Current Showfile Displays the name of the currently open show file Patch On Off Indicates whether patch is turned on or off Patch On Off will be covered in the next chapter Patch Edit Enabled Disabled Patch Edit is displayed when patch is enabled from the Patch menu The box is blank when patch is disabled from the Patch menu Live Preview Mode Indicates whether the console is in the Live or Preview mode The Live Mode is used for live editing While the Live button is selected any manual control actions or event recalls cues effects dynamic states etc will be executed in real time on stage The Preview Mod
182. ell will be pasted into all selected cells 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 213 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 214 Pasting Many To Many s If more than one cell is resident on the clipboard the following method is used Data is pasted in Row by Row There is a 1 1 mapping of rows in the clipboard to rows in the selection If there are more rows in the selection than there are in the clipboard nothing will be pasted into these rows If there are fewer rows in the selection than on the clipboard the remaining rows in the clipboard will be ignored Note This same logic is applied to extra cells in the clipboard or selection for each row 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 12 02 9668 0001A Advanced Effects Features This chapter contains instructions for storing and modifying effects utilizing advanced console features These instructions build on the basic store and playback instructions provided in the Basic Effects chapter on page 115 e Advanced Attributes e Effect Timing e Advanced Playback 12 April 01 215 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 216 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED EFFECTS FEATURES ADVANCED ATTRIBUTES Advanced Attributes Changing Direction Mode or Start Settings Direction Mode and Start attributes can be defined using the Effects controls and or associated effects windows These attributes are always stored into
183. ely indicates the presence of MIDI traffic not that the traffic is necessarily valid MIDI traffic SMPTE Input An external trigger port is also available on the console rear panel which supports the input of SMPTE time code Switch Closure Trigger Input The switch closure trigger port is wired to the Board Control Go button Closing the switch by any compatible device is the equivalent of pressing this button The switch closure trigger port will accept a 1 8 mini mono phone plug which can be purchased from Vari Lite or other electronics outlets refer to Accessories List on page 7 for part numbers To Switch 286 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW CONTROL BY EXTERNAL DEVICES MIDI NOTES 17 MIDI Notes Note Mapping The console accepts MIDI note messages Each MIDI note is mapped to a single macro for the first 127 macros When the console receives the note it will execute the corresponding macro Table 14 1 MIDI Note Mapping MIDI Note Macro No MIDI Note Macro No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bb 2 10 D1 38 B 2 11 Ebl 39 C 1 12 El 40 C 1 13 Fl 41 D 1 14 F 1 42 Eb 1 15 Gl 43 E 1 16 G 1 44 F 1 17 Al 45 F 1 18 Bbl 46 G 1 19 Bl 47 G 1 20 C2 48 A 1 21 C 2 49 Bb 1 22 D2 50 B 1 23 Eb2 51 CO 24 E2 52 C 0 25 F2 53 DO 26 FH2 54 Eb0 27 G2 55 EO 28 G 2 56 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 287 VARI LITE
184. en a luminaire is active it will store data for all parameters including intensity Also a selected submaster and its associated cue are considered active A group of channels selected on the fly which has not already been pre stored as a group Ad Hoc channel selection is based on information such as all channels in a specific preset The size shape and sharpness of the light image being output by a luminaire Also a function of the luminaire related to the above characteristics In a wash luminaire beam defines lamp centering position In a spot luminaire beam defines the iris size Programmed beam attributes which can be applied to selected channels using the Beam select display or command line keypad When the console s overall intensity output level is set to zero 0 A method for orchestrating the playback of recorded events on submasters By using a board cue a number of cues and effects can be loaded and activated in faders simultaneously or with timing delays on a cue basis Digital data signals transmitted from the control console to the luminaires and interface devices The signal is received by all luminaires simultaneously and interpreted by each indi vidually A submaster mode in which pressing the submaster s Select button will instantly bump full intensity as provided by the cue and fader position for all channels in the active cue A control reference which collects a device s associated
185. ent tre effectu es uniquement par des personnes qualifi es AVERTISSEMENT INTERFERENCE RF 1 Cet appareil est de Classe A Dans un environnement domestique cet appareil peut causer des interf rences radio et si c est le cas l utilisateur peut avoir a prendre des mesures ad quates 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 ix VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Aviso sobre Seguridad Es muy importante leer TODA la informaci n e instrucciones sobre seguridad que se indica en este manual as como en los documentos adjuntos antes de instalar y operar los productos descritos Se debe prestar atenci n a todos los avisos y advertencias durante la instalaci n y uso de este producto Los s mbolos de seguridad usados en este manual son los siguientes MA CUIDADO indica posibles da os al producto AN ADVERTENCIA indica posibles lesiones o muerte a las personas LA INFORMACI N GENERAL RELACIONADA A LA PROTECCI N CONTRA INCENDIO Y GOLPES DE CORRIENTE EL CTRICA ADVERTENCIA INSTRUCCIONES PARA PROTECCION CONTINUA CONTRA INCENDIO 1 Reemplaze los fusibles solamente con los del mismo tipo y especificaci n ADVERTENCIA INSTRUCCIONES PARA PROTECCI N CONTINUA CONTRA CHOQUE ELECTRICO 1 Los controles de la consola de VARIXLITEO est n dise ados solamente para lugares secos La exposici n a la lluvia o humedad pueden da ar la consola 2 Desconecte la energ a antes de dar servicio a cualquier equipo de VARI LITE
186. enzst rungen verursachen In diesem Fall m ssen eventuell geeignete Ma nahmen getroffen werden viii 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A NOTES DE S CURIT Notes de s curit Avant de proc der a l installation des produits d crits dans ce guide et de les mettre en marche il est extr mement important de lire TOUS les renseignements et TOUTES les directives de s curit contenues dans ce guide ainsi que toute documentation jointe Tenir compte de tous les avertissements et suivre toutes les pr cautions pendant V installation et l utilisation de cet appareil Les symboles de s curit utilis s dans ce guide sont les suivants AN ATTENTION Ce symbole annonce que l appareil risque d tre endommag AN AVERTISSEMENT Ce symbole annonce qu il y a risque accident grave ou m me fatal CETTE SECTION CONTIENT DES INFORMATIONS G N RALES POUR SE PROTEGER CONTRE LES INCENDIES ET LES DECHARGES ELECTRIQUES AVERTISSEMENT DIRECTIVES POUR SE PROTEGER CONTRE LES INCENDIES 1 Ne remplacer les fusibles ou avec ceux du m me type ayant les m mes caract ristiques AVERTISSEMENT DIRECTIVES POUR SE PROTEGER CONTRE LES DECHARGES ELECTRIQUES 1 Les consoles de commande VARI LITE sont con ues pour une utilisation au sec uniquement Une exposition la pluie et l humidit risque d endommager la console 2 D brancher I appareil avant de proc der la r vision de tout mat riel VARI LITE 3 Les r visions doiv
187. er to Ch 7 for more detailed instructions 1 Create a set as follows a AtPanels menu choose Select Displays Select Displays window will open b At Group section of window click inside Group 1 box Channels 1 5 your group of luminaires will now be selected Click inside box 1 to select Group 1 Ensure Select mode Is active A AA A AA A A IAN E A At Data menu select Sets Sets window will open C d Using cursor select Set 1 at upper half of window e At lower half of window while holding Shift select Parts 1 3 f Click Int Interlaced button Your group of five luminaires will be dis tributed across the three parts Click to select Set 1 Interlaced distribution Parts shown here correspond to Set selected above Select Parts 1 3 308 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A mom A 2 Create a sequence as follows At Data menu select Sequences Sequences window will open b Using cursor select Sequence 1 at upper half of window c At lower half of window at Step 1 Action 1 use popup menu to select Preset PSet d At Action 1 value enter 1 This specifies that the luminaires will move to Preset 1 in the first step of the sequence e At Step 2 Action 1 use popup menu to select Preset PSet f At Action 1 value enter 2 This specifies that the luminaires will move to Preset 2 in the second step of the sequence g At Time section of window enter 2 00 for both Step time
188. erdlibrate Erase luminaire Maia jmdate Conti E Draut alan Dear erect Linipearatigr Lead Parita livid Geigy Filter D Start 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH 2 Patch Overview Patching is the simplest way to manage the luminaires connected to the console Patch associates a single control channel with a single luminaire so that you can select one channel at the console and have control of all the luminaire s parameters intensity color beam etc The patch operates by creating a look up table that the console uses to translate a luminaire s associated thumbwheel address es into a single control channel DMX Fixtures DMX fixtures must be patched to the Virtuoso DX console using a profile in order to be controlled Patching connects the fixture to a DMX universe and allows its thumbwheel address to be associated to a control channel A DMX profile includes the number of DMX channels required to operate a fixture and parameter mapping for console control Patching any fixture to the Virtuoso DX console requires a thumbwheel address The address is not a setting made at the fixture but must be included and must not be used by any other device in the system This enables fixtures to be accessed in PATCH OFF mode VARIXLITE Luminaires VARI KLITE luminaires are patched directly by their thumbwheel address This address is determined by the port connection at the Smart Repeater unit The patch logicall
189. ered in the Advanced Effects chapter When changes have been made to an effect MOD will be displayed in the Effects select display to indicate that a store operation is necessary in order to save changes If a new effect is selected before storing changes will be lost Indicates that a store operation is necessary EFFECTS MOD Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 6 7 8 9 10 From Keypad Use sets and sequences to create an effect Note The default set is Set 0 which contains all patched channels as a single part If you plan to use Set 0 programming a set will not be necessary Effect n Changes will be reflected in Effects Control display with Effect highlighted Step 2 Press Store Effect n to store changes a Step 1 Press Effect n Set n Seq n Enter to define a set and sequence for Effect 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 131 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL From Effects Select Displays Use sets and sequences to create an effect O Step 1 Step 2 Step Step 4 Step Step 6 132 At Effects Control press Effects Selects will display Effects Sets Sequences At Effects select display select an effect to create 3 At Sets display select a set At Sequences display select a sequence 5 Press Store Effect Select Button to store selected set and sequence into effect Label your effect by pressing Label Effect Select Button xxx
190. es in touch screen OOO ORO O Dynamic State Attributes Each dynamic state has three adjustable parameters orientation size and speed Orientation Not implemented in this software version Size Size determines the size of the luminaire s path during a dynamic state This can be adjusted using the Dynamics soft encoder set For example increasing the size of a Figure 8 would result in a larger 8 by enlarging the path of travel for the luminaires 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS DYNAMIC STATE MODE 3 Rate Rate determines the speed the luminaires will move once they are in the dynamic state The parameter timing dictates the amount of time the luminaire is to move from its current position into its dynamic state This can be adjusted using the Dynamics soft encoder set For example assume that channels 1 through 10 are placed in a dynamic circle state with a size of n and a rate of x When the dynamic state is stored into a cue the pan and tilt parameters for channels 1 through 10 have a delay of 2 seconds and time of 10 seconds When that cue is played back the pan and tilt action will hold for 2 seconds They will then take 10 seconds to transition from their previous states to the full pos
191. es status information which includes pending and active cues rate value filter settings a timing counter and mode indicators I FIE Le CIBIG rate 100 Filter Grid FIC ech Modes if any E 2 Rate Value Pending Cue e Rdwash Active Cue 01 Shows autofollow time or cue execution time if no autofollow is specified 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Submasters Window The Submasters window can be used to control playback of events just as the panel submasters Bank buttons provide access to all 30 soft submasters in groups of five e At Panels menu select Submasters to access window i E E E A Mode Buttons Bank Buttons el i EEE ji 7 di 20043 Playback Controls The display associated with each submaster provides status information which includes pending and active cues rate value filter settings a timing counter and mode indicators I FIE Le CIBIG rate 100 Filter Grid FCDTI 52 aa Value Mode Indicators Blwash Pending Cue Rdwash y Active Cue R 228 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS SUBMASTER MODES 13 Submaster Modes Using Choose and Clear Choose The Choose button when pressed along with any of the submaster control buttons allows the submaster to be placed in a variety of different modes These modes Rate
192. ess P at keyboard d Enter 1 for the preset number e Click OK Current 3D graphic look is now stored as Preset 1 for future recall 2 Store Preset 2 as follows a At encoder window use Pan and Tilt encoders to move luminaires to new position b At Select Displays window at Color section click inside Color 8 box Beams will now change color in 3D Graphic window Color Section Click inside box 8 to select color krae Ga 3 AENA Ensure Select mode EE d BT d is active A z a a s D d a la c Press F1 select Preset enter 2 for the new preset number and click OK New 3D graphic look is now stored as Preset 2 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 301 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 3 At Select Displays window at Preset section alternately click inside Preset 1 and Preset 2 boxes Note the changes in 3D graphic window Preset 2 Preset 1 Store two cues and play back Refer to Ch 6 for more detailed instructions 1 Store Cue 1 as follows a At3D Graphic window click somewhere inside window to deselect luminaires b While holding down keyboard Shift key click on both VL6 luminaires to select c At Encoders window click Out Beams will Click to take i luminaires to go to zero no intensity Refer to screen zero intensity captures on next page d Press F1 e Enter 1 as cue number f Click OK to store cue 302 12 Apr
193. everse an Update command e Undo Enter reverses the last store update delete command 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 203 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Sel Store 204 Tip C gt Selective Store The Selective Store feature is used to modify or add parameter data to a cue preset or beam state for specified channels active or inactive For example with this function you could modify a cue s color parameters while leaving all other parameter data intact for a particular cue or a range of cues Selective Store is most useful when you know the exact range of cues to be modified Note Unlike Update Selective Store commands are routed through the Channel Select panel and the filter settings Selective Store new data for a particular parameter in a cue Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 At touch screen modify a parameter s as required For example color Step 3 Press Sel Store lt Cue gt n Enter The new color parameters will be stored in place of the old color parameters but all other parameter data will remain the same Selective Store new data for a particular parameter in a range of cues Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 At touch screen modify a parameter s as required For example color Step 3 Press Sel Store lt Cue gt n Thru m Enter The new color parameters will be stored in place of the old color parameters but all other parameter data will remain the
194. eze Note If a cue is stored while a submaster is frozen the end goal of the event will be the data stored Freeze a cue Step 1 Press Freeze along with Choose button for required submaster This will instantaneously halt the cue or effect Step 2 Press the Run button to resume cue or press Back button to fade to previous cue on that submaster in associated time values unless timing is filtered 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 231 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Func Filter 232 Function Filter The Function Filter applies filters to a submaster for modification of a cue or effect during playback The Function Filter works in conjunction with the touch screen display s Filter Mode Guidelines s The function filter does not become active until the next event is recalled e Ifacue has a mask associated with it the submaster filter state will override the mask All parameters will be played back whether or not they were originally intended for playback when the cue was stored Refer to Masking on page 147 Apply filters to a submaster Step 1 At touch screen select Filter Mode and set filter parameters Step 2 Press Func Filter Choose on required submaster Modifying filter settings If filters are modified at the touch screen after initially assigning to a submaster you must press Func Filter Choose again to update the filter changes in the submaster Using Filters wit
195. f Vari Lite s patented technology copyrights trade secrets trademarks and or other Proprietary Rights 3 Restrictions The Software contains proprietary information that is possibly protected by a combination of patent copyright trade secret and or other Proprietary Rights and constitutes valuable property of Vari Lite You acknowledge that the Software is disclosed in circumstances of confidence and only for use by you under the terms and conditions of this License and that you do not acquire any rights of ownership or title in the Software You may not attempt to create or derive source codes by disassembly reverse engineering or any other method or otherwise reduce the Software to a human perceivable form You may not modify or translate any part of the Software You may not use disclose distribute make or have made any copies of the Software in whole or in part without the prior written authorization of Vari Lite You agree to make reasonable efforts to notify and inform your employees or agents having access to the Software of your limitations duties and obligations regarding non disclosure and copying of the Software The Software shall be used only by you your employees or your authorized agents You agree to provide notice to Vari Lite immediately after learning of or having reason to suspect a breach of any of the restrictions set forth in this License 4 Termination This License is effective until terminated You may termin
196. fect to create such actions as fade in fade out attack sustain and decay Timing values are displayed in the encoder window and can be adjusted using the encoders Timing can also be assigned and modified using the command line keypad and associated windows Note When creating a new step 1t will default to the same timing values as the previous step Example of a 3 Step 3 Part Cascade Effect with timing attributes Effect 2 Fade In 25 Fade Out 25 Part 1 VL5 Group Wave 2 00 Part 2 VL6 G Step 1 00 ar roup Part 3 VL7 Group A Set Sequence Y Step 1 Step 1 0 Attack 30 Sustain 70 Step 2 Step 1 0 Attack 30 Sustain 70 Step 3 Step 1 0 Attack 30 Sustain 70 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED EFFECTS FEATURES EFFECT TIMING Effect Level Timing Timing attributes are available on an effect level to control the overall step times fade in fade out and wave time for each effect e Step Time the time between activation of a sequence step and the next sequential step On an effects level Step Time can be used in two ways either to set all sequence steps to the same timing value or to scale the timing values of sequence steps when sequence steps have different timing values already stored Step times can also be set individually from the Sequence Editing mode re
197. fer to Sequence Level Timing on page 221 Effect Duration Step Step Time gt lt 3 Time gt lt J3 Time Fade In Fade Out e Fade In Time 0 59 59 allows channels to begin the effect sequence while fading to the full intensity value required by the effect steps If there is no fade in time the effect bumps in Fade Out Time 0 59 59 allows channels to fade out after exiting the effect This timing value is only assumed by channels that are going inactive in the incoming cue or when the cycle or duration time has expired Any channels involved in the incoming cue would immediately cease activation in the effect and fade to their new cue levels in the time provided by the incoming cue If there is no Fade Out Time all channels will immediately stop the effect pattern and fade to their new instructions in the time dictated by the incoming cue If they are not involved in the incoming cue they will fade to inactive in the out time of the incoming cue Wave Time the time it will take an effect to loop back to the beginning A wave time can be specified using the Effects window Only applies to Break or Cycle modes Note A wave time can only be greater than the total sequence time i e the wave time will never cut a sequence short only add a gap before the sequence starts again Effect Wave Time Gel Wave Time el Wave Time 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 219 V
198. ffect store and playback intensity levels When used in combination with the manual control intensity encoder the Grand Master fader and any selected submaster faders all play a part in the final intensity output level by a proportional calculation Grand Master Black Out The console provides two methods for mastering overall intensity output the Grand Master fader and its associated Black Out button The Grand Master fader can be used to proportionally master the intensity output The Black Out button when engaged sets all intensities to zero If a cue preset is stored with the Grand Master fader at zero or the Black Out button engaged the luminaires would be considered zero If a cue preset is stored with the Grand Master fader set between 0 and 100 percent then the intensity value stored with the cue preset would be proportionally affected as noted in the following examples Cue Store Scenario 1 with all submasters deselected Selected channels have an intensity value of 100 Grand Master fader is set at 50 Channels are stored into the cue with intensity values of 50 Cue Store Scenario 2 with all submasters deselected Selected channels have an intensity value of 50 Grand Master fader is set at 50 Channels are stored into the cue with intensity values of 25 Note These two simplified examples are intended to help show the relationship of intensity controls Many more combinations are possible 12 April 01
199. for control The submaster fader can then be used to scale the intensity output for those channels For example this function could be used to adjust the intensities of specific luminaires in order to brighten or dim certain areas of a stage When channels are manually assigned to a submaster the current cue or stage look associated with those channels is now controlled by the submaster fader until such time as the manual assignments are cleared from the submaster a new cue is played or a manual control action is made at the Manual Control panel Guidelines e Channels parameters can be taken away from the submaster when a new command is issued by a playback unless the submaster is in independent mode refer to Independent above e Manual assignments will be cleared when a new cue is played back on that submaster the channels will fade out in the out fade time of the incoming cue or effect e If filters are being used with the submaster they will modify the manually assigned channels accordingly refer to Function Filter on page 232 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS SUBMASTER MODES 13 e Unlike other submaster functions the submaster must first be selected before assigning manual control e Channels may be added by manual assignment to a submaster that has channel filters However this does not add those channels to the list of filtered channels refer to Channel Filter on page 233 Manually assign a c
200. g Presets from the keypad Presets maintain this number even when given another label Store a new Preset Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 3 Filter attributes as required using Filter Display window Step 4 Press Store Preset n Enter or Store Preset n Label xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Preset number Add new channels to a Preset Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Press Store Preset n Enter or Store Preset n Label xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Preset number 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS PRESETS A Delete a Preset Step 1 Select all channels in that Preset select Step 2 Delete Preset n Enter The display will now show this as an empty Preset Recall a Preset Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels that have data stored in that Preset will be affected Step 2 Press Preset n Enter where n is the discrete Preset number 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 89 VARHEx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Groups Overview To automate channel selection groups of channels may be stored into the Group selects available in the panel Select Displays or Select Displays window Groups can also be created and recalled from the command line keypad For example you could store all VL5 luminaires as one group all VL6 luminaires as another
201. ged at anytime by re opening window and typing in new name Type name for console Version info Primary Console Console Mame ee ei Thumbabeel Versia 2 067 3000 Yari Lite ine HadiTisd Thu Apr 27 2000 11 70 AM Devices Harts Version Date Heed Updated Meteor k Letzte 2 061 AZ 1 00 wl 3300 Repair UAE Fi 12 3 99 3 54 PH SP Se 2061 4725 00 12 36 PR amr lt Det AE 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 23 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Store Configuration Your system setup displayed in the System Configuration window can be stored for future reference Once stored in the event a device is not online when the system is powered up the missing device s icon would appear grayed out in the window This aids in detecting online problems by showing where an item should be if it is not reporting back Store a system configuration At Special menu select Store Configuration Clear a stored configuration e At Special menu select Clear Stored Configuration Update Configuration In the event a new device s is added to your system while the console is powered up the system can be repolled so that the new device s will appear in the System Configuration window This is not related to the Stored Configuration function Update a configuration e At Special menu select Update Configuration 30 Mar 01 Tank Progress i eek Select Parked Dairtforys Alara henny Stania Reset f
202. group etc These groups can be labeled in the group select bank as VL5 and VL6 or perhaps Wash and Spot Storing Modifying and Recalling Groups Note When an existing Group is updated or re stored the new information replaces the old information It does not add to the existing group information From Panel Select Displays Store a group Step 1 Select channels to be stored in group refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 Step 2 Access required Bank and Page Step 3 Press Store Group Select Button or Store Label Group Select Button xxxxxx return Label a group When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard e Label Group Select Button xxxxxx return Recall a group Step 1 Access required Bank and Page Step 2 Press required Group Select Button 90 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS GROUPS A Recall two or more groups Step 1 Access required Bank and Page of first group Step 2 Press required Group Select Button Step 3 Access required Bank and Page of second group Step 4 Press required Group Select Button of second group Hold down Page Button to pile on selections Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as required Modify a group Modifications to existing groups can be done in the same manner as storing the original group as given above From Select Displays Window When stor
203. gs as required Step 2 Select required channels Step 3 Press Sel Store Preset Select Button or Sel Store Preset n Enter where n is the discrete Preset number Update a preset The Update command does not add channels but modifies any stored data that has been changed by manual control for channels and parameters associated with that Preset It does not route through the filter settings For more information refer to Update on page 203 Step 1 Make changes by manual control Step 2 Press Update Preset Select Button or Update Preset n Enter where n is the discrete Preset number Delete an entire Preset Step 1 Select all channels in that Preset Step 2 Delete Preset n Enter where n is the discrete preset number or Delete Preset Select Button The display will now show this as an empty Preset Note Unexpected behavior may occur for cues referencing a deleted preset Cues will be played back with intensity at zero for channels that reference a deleted preset This acts as a warning that cue data is incomplete To verify this has happened check the console log window available from the Setup menu Delete a specific channel es Preset data Step 1 Select channels you wish to remove from a Preset Step 2 Delete Preset n Enter where n is the discrete preset number or Delete Preset Select Button Recall a preset using Presets select display Step
204. h Effects Filters can be used with effects to withhold information from cues beams and presets when they are part of an effect sequence When cues are included in sequences the cue times are used instead of attack times unless timing is disabled in the filter selection Clear filters from submaster Step 1 At touch screen clear all filter selections Step 2 Press Func Filter Choose at submaster to clear 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS SUBMASTER MODES 13 Channel Filter submaster Those filtered channels then become the only channels used by the submaster whenever it plays back a cue or effect The Channel Filter feature is used to specify certain channels for playback on a Filter Filter a channel s Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Press Chan Filter along with Choose button for required submaster Release a Channel Filter Step 1 Deselect all channels Step 2 Press Chan Filter Choose at submaster to clear Dynamic Disable a The Dynamic Disable feature disables the playback of any macros and or snapshots linked to a cue For example if you wish to view data in a particular cue you could disable any linked event s so that it will not occur upon completion of the cue Apply Dynamic Disable to a submaster e Press Dyn Dsbl along with Choose button for required submaster Release a submaster from Dynamic Disable mode e Press Dyn Dsbl Choose at submaster to clear Timing
205. han have Pdting Step 3 For each required universe do the following a Using cursor select universe by letter A Z b Select DMX Host If NIF is selected also select Bus A or B c For NIF or UDM units enter thumbwheel address d Click Set DMX Universe A Z Must be assigned to a device UDM NIF etc by thumbwheel address DMX channel assignments for selected universe For use with DMX diagnostics feature Thumbwheel assignment NIF bus assignment Only available when NIF is selected since NIF has two buses not yet implemented For instructions on using DMX diagnostics refer to DMX Channel Tests on page 279 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH 2 To patch a DMX or conventional fixture Depending on whether you are patching a generic DMX fixture or a conventional fixture a slightly different patch window will open when you drop the respective icon into the Plan View window Displays as 2D or 3D DMX Fixture Icon configuration in window Total Channels Conventional Fixture Icon Channel Number Refer to 2D 3D Mode Guidelines on page 37 for more information Step 1 At Plan View window icon bar select either DMX or conventional fixture icon as required Step 2 At desired location on plan view click to place icon Appropriate DMX or Conventional Patch window will open Step 3 At DMX or Conventional Patch window do the fo
206. hannel range of channels or group Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 At required submaster press Select Step 3 Press Man Assign along with Choose button for required submaster Assign new channels to a previous manual assignment The Manual Assign function is an additive process which will allow you to add channels to an existing manual assignment Step 1 Select new channels Step 2 At required submaster press Select Step 3 Press Man Assign along with Choose button for required submaster Release a manual assignment using Choose or Clear When releasing a submaster from a manual assignment using these methods no parameter data will be changed the channel is just no longer associated with that submaster e Press Man Assign Choose Choose at associated submaster or e Press Clear along with Choose button of associated submaster to clear submaster of all modes Intensity Level with Manual Assign When channels are assigned to a submaster using the Manual Assign function the current intensity value for the selected channels at the time of being assigned becomes the full intensity range which can be adjusted by the submaster fader Example 1 If a channel is assigned while its intensity value is at 100 the submaster fader will have control of all 100 of the luminaire s potential intensity output Subse quently reducing the submaster fader from 100 to 50 would result in a luminai
207. hat data from the target preset Filters are ignored during preset recall and cue preset update commands Applied submaster filters take effect on the next cue recall A touch screen display mode which provides access to filter states A function which moves pan 180 degrees about the zero axis and reflects tilt about the zero axis Inverts gobo if present The point to which the light beam is directed Also a function of the luminaire related to the direction of the beam as specified by pan and or tilt data A submaster mode which halts cue movement on that submaster A beam attribute available in some DMX controlled luminaires Control for frost is provided by the soft encoders 12 April 01 313 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Function Function Filter Gobo Grand Master Group Group Select Hard Reset Hue HTP Inactive Independent Indexing Intensity Label Link Live Editing Load 314 One of the variable operational parameters of luminaires intensity focus color beam gobo timing and dynamic states A submaster mode which transfers the current filter settings to the selected submaster A luminaire mechanism which allows projection of a design or custom image in the light beam Fader which masters the overall intensity output of the console Its contribution is cal culated after input of stored cue values and submaster fader settings A collection of luminaire
208. i es a Been a EE e Suave EN 246 Use of Filters with Color Store 247 Buttons Key vistas cra ti 247 Timecode AUS Willian into a 247 Display Filters Loading Filter iaa 248 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 xxi VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Multi Console Features Setting Up a Backup Console nono corno cono c rn ncnnncnnncnn ccoo 249 Primary and Secondary Setups oooocococcconcconnnonnnonnnnncconnconccnnncnn conan crnn crono rn nana nano 249 Online Bak ee e reaa eaae raaa a n idiota Ees 249 See EE 250 Configuring Multiple Consoles AA 250 Disable Console iaa 251 Off Line Programming Performing Off Line Programming nono conan con nc rn nannncnnos 252 Chapter 15 3D Graphic Display 3D Features OEI Wins olaa 255 Defining a New Venue sccsicscivesctiteesspecte lt clicar 255 Importing Veleta 256 3D Layer COOL a tota 257 Exporting a Scene casio is ic td 257 Match Do A A A A A EES 258 3D Display Window Defining X Y Z Locations ee Eed 259 Changing 3D Height Location sosie nsii 260 Using 3D Graphic Window coococcocconcnonnconcconacononannnnn non nooo acnnncnn nana a i a i 261 STREIT 263 Live Preview Mode DV CLVIC Witt E 264 Using Preview Modena tipa 265 Chapter 16 Show Maintenance Data Management Show File Manager Agent 269 Open New Show Pile amaia iota 269 Open Existing Show Pile ui A E se 270 Rename Duplicate or Delete Show Pie 270 Backup Show File to Disk comicidad tati 270 Import Show RE 271 D
209. il 01 02 9668 0001A 2 Store Cue 2 as follows a At Encoders window click Full to return intensity to VL6 luminaires b At Select Displays window click inside Color 2 box to change beams to red c Press F1 enter 2 as cue number and click Click to bring K luminaires to OK to store full intensity Color Section Click inside box 2 to select color Ensure Select mode is active 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 303 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 3 Select Cue 1 as follows a At Operation menu select Cue Sheet b At Cue Sheet window select Cue 1 4 Load Submaster and playback cues as follows At Panels menu select Submasters b Click Load of selected submaster to load cue C1 00 will appear in submaster s window c At Submasters window click Select button to select submaster for playback d Click Go of selected submaster to playback Cue 1 e Click Go a second time to playback Cue 2 f Press Back to play Cue again Note changes in 3D Graphic window as cues are played Cue 1 Loaded Click to select submaster for playback Click to playback cue 304 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Add timing and filters to presets and cues Refer to Ch 8 for more detailed instructions 1 Recall Preset 2 as follows At Panels menu choose Select Displays b At Select Displays window at Group section click inside Group 1 box Channels luminaires 1 5 a
210. iles on page 277 Text Conventions The following styles and meanings are used throughout this manual Arial Font Software display buttons and menu selec tions Example Click on SAVE Button Panel hard button Example Press Cue Button 1 Button 2 Button combination sequence Press and hold button 1while pressing button 2 lt Button gt Optional button press Example Press lt Cue gt Soft Touch screen soft button return Macintosh keyboard key Suggestions If you have suggestions for software improvements enhancements or new frontiers we d like to hear them Please email comments to marketing vari lite com 2 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 1 Overview and Installation This chapter provides an overview of console features accessories and operations along with instructions for connecting console components e Console Overview Installation Procedures e Operation Overview 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 4 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A OVERVIEW AND INSTALLATION CONSOLE OVERVIEW 1 Console Overview atend of manual Virtuoso DX Console Features 02 9668 0001A The Virtuoso DX console is an automated control desk capable of operating VARI LITE luminaires DMX moving lights and conventional lights The console utilizes Virtuoso protocol and or DMX512 to control the fixtures It
211. ill bring up the preset live Step 3 Press Next First channel will stay active while all other channels go to inactive state Step 4 Modify focus or other parameters as required Step 5 Press Next to go to next channel When the last channel with stored infor mation has been brought up and adjusted pressing the Next button activates the entire modified preset Step 6 Re store preset to save changes Press QuickFocus to exit mode Or Last as required 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SPECIAL FEATURES ADVANCED CONTROL 9 Park The Park feature allows you to place a luminaire into a state in which it will not respond to any manual or playback commands nor will it store into any cues This feature is useful for setting up work lights or other special lights that won t be part of the show Park a luminaire s and PPO ree Step 1 Select required channel s ERAS ech Select Parked QeickForus F Step 2 At Special menu select Park Selected channels will now be parked Release a parked luminaire s Step 1 At Special menu choose Select Parked All Parked luminaires will be selected Step 2 At Special menu select UnPark Luminaires will now respond to commands as usual Es Alar Timing Mate Reset feralibrete Erase Luminaire Dein igdabe Coniigeratiem EN Shore Comkguraliati Hear tered Comliparalian ead Fanibean L d eplay Filter D Aart Durr 02 9668 0001
212. ilter and rate settings from a submaster e Press Clear along with the Choose button for the required submaster Clear active and pending cues from a submaster e Press Clear along with double clicking the Choose button for the required submaster 230 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS SUBMASTER MODES 13 Rate The Rate feature speeds up or slows down the playback of events cues or effects The Rate encoder allows a percentage adjustment from 0 999 with 999 being the fastest rate and 0 causing the event to stop e The default is 100 which is real time 5 seconds 5 seconds e Decrease the percentage to slow down the event 50 rate applied to 5 seconds 10 seconds Increase the rate percentage to speed up the event 200 rate applied to 5 seconds 2 5 seconds Guidelines e All timing values associated with an event luminaire delay and times cue out time waits and trails are affected by the rate modification proportionally e Ifa cueis complete the rate adjustment will affect the pending cue When the pending cue is activated the adjusted rate is used to determine timing Set rate for a submaster Step 1 Press Rate along with Choose button for required submaster Step 2 Use Rate Control encoder to adjust rate to required value Release submaster from Rate mode e Press Rate Choose at submaster to clear Freeze The Freeze feature halts an event in mid transition Fre
213. inaire channel for each luminaire type 1f the default lowest active channel has not been changed refer to Settings Window on page 245 Step 2 Ensure Colors are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Select required bank and select page Step 4 Press Store Color Select Button Store a new color using command line keypad Step 1 Ensure color you wish to store is displayed in lowest active luminaire channel for each luminaire type if the default lowest active channel has not been changed refer to Settings Window on page 245 Step 2 Press Store Color n Enter where nts the discrete Color number Label an existing color page or bank Note When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Step 1 Ensure Colors are selected on at least one select display Step 2 Press Label Color Select Button xxxxxx return or Label Page Select Button xxxxxx return or Label Bank Select Button xxxxxx return as required Recall a color using Colors select display Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Ensure Colors are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Press required Color Select Button 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS COLORS A Recall a color using command line keypad Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Press Color n Enter where n is the dis
214. ine keypad and or optional Channel Select panel When selecting channels the channels will light in the window on the Channel Select panel and their respective icons will be highlighted in the Plan View window 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 41 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 42 From Channel Select Window Open window by selecting Channel Select at the Windows menu Deselects current channels and selects all other patched channels Selects all Selects all patched channels Clears all channel selections Millennium Button Routes control to first 1000 channels when not active or second 1000 when active Selected button Century Buttons 0 900 Routes the 100 button array to one of ten pages la 100 200 poo foo Bod po zoo poo poo active channels Selects all channels which are in a marked state Selects all channels which are in a zero state tier 200 ooa Select a single channel or multiple single channels Step 1 Using cursor click 1000 as required Step 2 Click 0 through 900 as required Button will light Step 3 Click button of channel number to be selected Button will light Status Mimic Buttons Highlight buttons of channels in online active marked or zero status states does not select channels 100 Button Array Represents a group of 100 channels as determined by the millennium and century buttons Step 4 To select multiple single channels
215. ing Channels on page 41 Filter parameters as required and adjust with manual control functions To store label update delete and recall Beams refer to the procedures given in Select Displays Window on page 71 From Keypad Store a new Beam Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 3 Filter attributes as required using Filter Display window Step 4 Press Store Beam n Enter or Store Beam n Label Enter xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Beam number Add new types to a Beam Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 3 Filter attributes as required using Filter Display window Step 4 Press Store Beam n Enter or Store Beam n Label Enter xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Beam number 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS BEAMS A Delete a Beam Step 1 Delete Beam n Enter The display will now show this as an empty Beam Recall a Beam Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels that have data stored in that Beam will be affected Step 2 Press Beam n Enter where n is the discrete Beam number 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 79 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Colors Overview The Color select provides a means for storing and recalling a palette of up to 300 colors These can be
216. ing or modifying Groups from the Select Displays first select channels to be stored in the Group refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 To store label update delete and recall groups refer to the procedures given in Select Displays Window on page 71 From Keypad Store a Group Step 1 Select channels to be stored in group refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 Step 2 Press Store Group n Enter Modify a Group Modifications to existing Groups can be done in the same manner as storing the original Group given above Recall a Group The following are samples of possible command line entries to recall a group e Group n Enter selects all channels in Group n Group e Group n m Enter selects all channels in Group n plus Channel m Group n Group m Enter selects all channels in Group n and Group m 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 91 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Macros Snapshots and Effects Overview Macros snapshots and effects can also be accessed at the panel select displays or the Select Displays window once you have stored them As with presets colors beams and groups their labels will appear in the window and selecting the corresponding select button will recall the event Instructions for storing and recalling these types of events are covered in this manual as follows e Basic Effects chapter on page 115 1 0 0
217. ions are property of Vari Lite Inc 201 Regal Row Dallas Texas 75247 USA Version as of 12 April 01 Printed in the USA Part number 02 9668 0001A Virtuoso DX Console User s Manual 2001 Vari Lite Inc All Rights Reserved ii 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE End User Software License PLEASE READ THIS DOCUMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE ACTIVATING COPYING INSTALLING OR USING THIS SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY VARI LITE INC BY ACTIVATING COPYING INSTALLING OR USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE DO NOT ACTI VATE COPY INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT FOR A REFUND 1 License Vari Lite Inc Vari Lite hereby grants you a limited license to install and use the Virtuoso DX software and related documentation collectively the Software solely with the Virtuoso DX console sold in conjunction with the Software Vari Lite retains all right title and interest to the Software which is protected by various proprietary rights including but not limited to copyrights trade secrets or patents Proprietary Rights No license right or interest in any trademark trade name or service mark of Vari Lite or any third party is granted under this License 2 No Implied License You acknowledge that this License in no way shall be construed to provide an implied license to use modify or improve any o
218. ired using cursor and alpha numeric keyboard i T 30 Localia e Click on a column heading block to sort information by that type a H j 0 a H 0 a a 4 36 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH EDITING 2 2D 3D Mode Guidelines The relationship between the 2D and 3D modes are important to understand when placing icons and editing in the Plan View window 3D Mode 2D Mode active in this screen snap Locates luminaires by Locates luminaires by X and Y coordinates X Y and Z coordinates o ele alelan ael i 24 Location Hode zji The 2D mode provides an X and Y coordinate for each luminaire icon to locate it in relation to a 2D scheme The 3D mode provides an additional coordinate Z in addition to X and Y to locate a luminaire in relation to a 3D scheme refer to Defining X Y Z Locations on page 259 for more information on the console s 3D Graphic features The relationship between these modes is as follows e When an icon is initially placed while in 2D mode its default X and Y coordinates are provided to its 3D location as well In other words X and Y for 2D and 3D are the same when an icon is first dropped They are considered linked at this point A default Z height value of 20 feet is also included in the 3D location data for the luminaire e Ifan icon is moved in the Plan View while in 2D mode the X and Y coordinates would be updated in its 2D patch information b
219. ired using touch screen display 5 Press Store Preset Select Button or Store Label Preset Select Button xxxxxx return Step Store a new preset using command line keypad Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 3 Filter attributes as required using touch screen display Step 4 Press Store Preset n Enter or Store Preset n Label xxxxxx return where n is the discrete Preset number Label an existing Preset select Step 1 Ensure Presets are selected on at least one select display Step 2 Press Label Preset Select Button xxxxxx return Add new channels to a Preset If a Preset is already stored the Store command can add new channels to that Preset provided those channels are selected If the channel already has data for the Preset that data will be overwritten with current data Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Ensure Presets are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Press Store Preset Select Button or Store Label Preset Select Button xxxxxx return 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS PRESETS A Modify parameters using Selective Store The Selective Store command modifies parameter data for selected channels as determined by any filter settings For more information refer to Selective Store on page 204 Step 1 At touch screen display modify filter settin
220. ish to add and release Step Select Button Step 5 To add intensity S a At Steps display press a Step Select Button 11 20 b At keypad press Step At 50 or Step At 50 Any intensity value 1 100 can be substituted for 50 Step 6 To add a cue a At keypad press Step 1 Cue n Enter Preset Color Beam etc can be used instead of Cue b At keypad press Step 1 Cue n Thru x Enter Step 7 Repeat Step 5 to store steps 2 3 4 Step 8 Label by pressing Label Sequence Select Button xxxxxx return SEQUENCES Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 6 7 8 9 10 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 127 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Delete a step e Press Delete Step Select Button of step you wish to delete Step will be deleted From Sequences Window Create a sequence Step 1 At Data menu select Sequences Sequences window will open Step 2 Using cursor select a Sequence Window will also respond to Sequence selections made at Effects panel Step 3 At Step portion of window use pop up menu and text Aerer fields to enter actions Cue ranges may also be specified Lee Each step may contain up to three actions Pegate Botz Lt Step 4 Repeat as necessary to store additional steps into sequences Step 5 Using keyboard label sequences as required E As
221. ist along with all associated filters which have been stored into the Beam select In addition by selecting a single Beam and clicking on the Data drop down window button all of its parameter data can be viewed The Value V button will display the numeric value which has been stored into each parameter The Dynamic D will display any associated dynamic state information The V and D toggle buttons allow you to display one or both types of information in the window Open Beam Palette Data window At Data menu select Beam Palette Data Associated Filters Applicable Luminaire Label CS Beam AVS Har Edge y Beam VS WLSArc WL6 VIF WSR VL6B VLIE HA ES dimos EES GS E Beam Number 5 H 6 6 Data Drop Down Window H 7 Displays data for selected 8 B Beam 3 a 10 10 1 ul Value bea Displays value that Device inten Focus Color Edge luminaire is reporting TLE HER ge D for the parameters when selected Le s nie ji YLE 2 En kees Dynamic Opens Parameter Columns window Displays dynamic state which is used to choose which information when selected columns appear in window Refer to Parameter Columns Window on page 61 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 75 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Hint CC 76 Storing Modifying and Recalling Beams Note Beams and colors are global settings by luminaire type The console will dr
222. ition required by the beginning of the dynamic state When those 10 second have elapsed they will begin the standard dynamic state transitions following the rate associated with the dynamic state Adjusting Parameters When the Dynamic mode is selected the screen window changes to allow selection of dynamic states Select states by pressing or clicking the appropriate button Once a state has been selected its orientation size and speed can be adjusted using the manual control soft encoders With dynamic state running at soft encoder display select Dyn The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 ORIENT min max Encoder 2 SIZE min max Encoder 3 RATE min max Using encoder knobs and min max buttons adjust parameters as required 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 151 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Storing Dynamic States as Cues Presets Dynamic states can be applied to luminaires or groups of luminaires and stored as a cue or preset Storing guidelines e When stored into a cue preset the state information as well as the established size speed and axis controlled from the encoders are stored e When stored into a cue preset the parameters affected by the dynamic state will follow the timing information for those parameters before assuming any dynamic state speed information e A dynamic state must be running in order to be stored as a cue preset Note Luminaires incapable of an action
223. ity the value changes to blue e While decreasing intensity the value changes to green e Channels changed by manual control are displayed in black on a yellow background e Channels with the same cue intensity tracking are displayed in pink e Channels changed by an effect are displayed in white on a black background 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL LUMINAIRE STATUS 3 For example if channels are brought up manually using an encoder the channel numbers turn to gold to indicate the channel selection and the levels appear in reverse text which highlights the fact that they are manually controlled Next if a cue is played back which overrides the intensity of these channels HTP the values would revert to normal text but would be displayed in blue refer to HTP Highest Takes Precedence on page 240 If the cue does not override the intensity they would remain in the manual control state color If another cue is played back in which the channels in blue fade down or out they would change to green during the fade Configuring How Information is Displayed In the window s default state all patched channels are listed horizontally with a vertical line inserted between non consecutive channel numbers User defined columns All channels shown with unpatched channels grayed out width of window is set scroll bar allows access to all channels 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 63 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE US
224. ive Board Cue board 2 CHORUS ene 1 START set board cue 1 Board Cue 1 Clear Board Cue indicators from display e Recall a non existent board cue For example Board Cue 0 Enter will clear display of any board cue information as long as Board Cue 0 is not a valid board cue 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 187 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Board Cues Window The content of board cues can be viewed in the Board Cues window This window displays all recorded board cues in numerical sequence and provides data regarding linked events which would run during playback Link attributes such as loops and autofollow types wait and trail are visible as well as the associated times refer to Special Cue Attributes on page 193 Unless links are provided which will run cues out of sequence any playback sequences will observe the numerical order found in the sheet The Delete Replace Punch In and Insert features allow editing so that an entire board cue does not have to be re recorded in order to make a change The Time column may also be edited Access Board Cue Sheet Step 1 At Operation menu select Board Cue Sheet Board Cue Sheet window will open Step 2 Edit Time column as required Board Cue Number Replace Delete Steps which are part of the selected Board Cue Timing information This can be edited 188 Snapshot Aier Auto Follow type wai
225. izer when to start and stop playing a specific note Since the basis for MIDI communication is the byte MIDI can also be used as an interface between musical instruments and computers or in this case a computer based lighting console In the same way that MIDI can command a note to start or stop Virtuoso console functions such as board cue execution can be initiated by a connected MIDI compatible device MIDI Notes are mapped console macros while MIDI timecode is recorded as a script SMPTE timecode is a communication protocol standard set forth by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers for handling of audio which is associated with motion images This is essentially the same as MIDI timecode except that it is analog while MIDI timecode is digital However once either of these signals enters the console they are stored as digital timecode scripts Note Only one form of timecode either MIDI or SMPTE can be input at one time 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 285 VAREx LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Input Options Switch Closure MIDI In Thru and SMPTE Input Trigger Port Out Connections Connection MIDI Input MIDI In Thru and Out connections are available on the console s rear panel which support any standard MIDI device connections The associated MIDI data LEDs will light when MIDI data are traveling through the MIDI port however the LED mer
226. ken between one channel selection and the next An intensity state of marked 0 level When a luminaire is marked it will store data for all parameters with intensity stored as marked 0 level When a cue is recalled a marked luminaire will move to the stored positions and if previously active fade out with the luminaire s intensity down time Prohibits move instructions from affecting those parameters on all luminaires in the cue during cue store actions Assignment of masks is a stored parameter attribute which may be applied during live recording via a Store Selective Store operation and in preview operations Masked values are displayed in preview mode and may be lifted via preview editing Used to establish control boundaries when more than one console is being used to control a lighting system A console can either share channel control with another console or it can have exclusive control Definition of control interaction is deter mined by the profiles assigned at the primary console A feature which allows preprogramming without having to connect to a system When in the off line mode all menus and windows are accessible just as if the system were online The off line feature does not eliminate the need for a console 12 April 01 315 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Out Out Time Page Park Part Patch Preset Preview Editing Primary Console Prism QuickFocus Rang
227. keypad press Time Enter An example of setting edge and focus timing Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 Edge Focus Time 5 Enter sets timing value for edge edge frost effect prism and focus pan tilt to one half second An example of setting focus delay time Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 Focus Time 1 0 Delay 5 Enter sets the timing values for focus pan tilt to 1 second with a one half second delay 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Shortcut gt Hint CC TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS TIMING MODE 8 Set color delay time Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 Color Time n Delay m Enter sets all color timing to n seconds with an m second delay Set intensity delay time Intensity timing can have two values one which controls the intensity transition if the intensity is fading to a higher level up time and one which controls the transition if the intensity is fading to a lower level down time Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 Intensity Time 1 0 Delay 5 Enter sets the up and down times to 1 second with a one half second delay Set intensity up or down time Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 Select Up or Down to select one individually then press Time 1 2 Enter sets the up or down fade time
228. l DMX Profiles 2 Text CONVENIOS EE 2 SUSSESTIONG cnica aia iba 2 Chapter 1 Overview and Installation Console Overview Virtuoso DX Console Features ccccceesseceseeceeeceeeceseaceceaeeceeeceeeeeaeceeaaeeceaeeeeaees 5 COmponents 23 5 feist el heres ti en SA a 6 Console erara ofiab ons e EE O EE Ea E a aigat 6 Macintosh Computer System ooooconocccocnnocnnocnnonononaconccnnncnnnonn crono cnn n cnn ncnnncnnnnnnn ninos 6 Channel Select Panel Optional ooonccnnccnnnccn nccnnonnconanonnncconnncnnno conan conan cc nnnccnnncn n 7 INCCESSOLIES ET 7 Installation Procedures Connecting Console amp Computer Componentz conan noo 8 Keyboard Lock Unlock eege ion ancla cess ae ees 9 Connecting Additional Components oooccnoccnocononnnoncnononnanonannnnonnnonn cnn no con non nccnnncnn coins 10 Installing Desk Lamps orita de is 11 Operation Overview Window Interaction EE 12 Menus and Button Batista ainia noise 12 Entering Editing Window Data 12 Closing WindOwWS aiii ai da 13 Status Indicator Bar ET 13 Routine Care and Maintenance Fiber Opti COnneCtors ei an 15 Cleaning the Console ninia latir Rhestiviadoticenlestun edd 16 Console Panel SUS isione ea a a e anaia 16 Console Display Srodna eenei a n ete eae inta 16 Chapter 2 Power Up and Patch Power Up DMX Systems Powering Up Console Sras a tthe tative eng 19 Powering Down Consoles sss ss dees ssecestcts eats ieee eni en aR ae iaeaea eiis 19 System Configuration Win
229. l buttons select channels in the Channel Select window A Gr a TY scht Lamp C Reset Start Arm Douse Active Invert Ne Ne agt A ES Se AS Ch Gef Ee H e Status online Active Mark Zero Mark All Sr 4 Nie i La A Se KEES Allows any manual changes by selects or encoders to follow current active Channel Select Panel optional 100 Button Array 90 Represents a group of 100 channels as S MEN SON man LES gS Man y Man f Vet Select 17 Zero Clear
230. label in keypad display e5 set effect 5 Colors Effect 5 Step 2 At desired submaster press Select to select submaster for playback function Step 3 Press Load to place effect in submaster s pending file Step 4 Ensure Grand Master fader is set at full Step 5 Ensure submaster fader is 100 Step 6 Press Go to play effect Display will indicate set sequence and step numbers as they run Step 7 Press Run to replay effect once it is active Play next effect The submaster always sequences placing the next available effect in the pending file e Press Go to play back pending effect Play previous effect The submaster can play back previously played effects in decrementing order e Press Back to play previous effect 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 Pending effect Active effect Selects submaster for playback Bim sic Loads effect e Sp Plays active effect eg Stops and steps Back through effect Plays last effect Plays pending effect Scales intensity D Ga 135 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Stop Step Se A running effect can be stopped and then stepped through one step at a time op Step 1
231. le Luminaires 0 1023 home 512 0 255 Function Pan Tilt Other Functions VARIXLITE Luminaires Time is entered in minutes and seconds or seconds and tenths of seconds Maximum time entry is 59 59 Refer to Time Speed Formats on page 142 Use discrete numbers from the following ranges for parameter values Function VL5 VI5Arc VL5B VL6 VL6B VL7 VL7B Pan Tilt 0 1023 0 1023 0 1023 Color 0 335 n a 0 255 Color Wheel n a 0 192 n a Beam n a 0 127 0 127 Edge 0 335 0 127 0 512 Zoom n a 0 255 0 100 Strobe n a 0 open 0 open 1 9 closed 1 9 closed 10 slow random 10 slow random 11 med random 11 med random 12 fast random 12 fast random 13 127 strobe 13 100 strobe Frame n a n a 0 255 Gobo Wheel n a 0 192 0 192 Rotating Gobo n a 0 5 0 360 Gobo Index n a 0 360 0 360 Home 512 for pan and 512 for tilt VL7B only 154 VL6B only 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS SNEAK MODE 8 Sneak Mode Operation When the Sneak mode is selected the screen window changes to allow modification of parameter values Values are entered on the keypad Perform a sneak action using current timing information Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At touch screen or window select Sneak mode Select parameter s to be involved in transition For example Pan Step 3 At keypad press Sneak
232. lected parameters in the Timing screen window would not receive this value 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 143 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 144 Use the examples below to send all values in the Timing screen or individual values to luminaires as required Set an entire timing scheme Step 1 At screen window select a parameter s Step 2 At keypad press Time Delay or Speed as required followed by time value Time value will appear in cells of selected parameters Step 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 selecting different parameters and entering new values Step 4 Select channels as required Step 5 Press Timing Enter button to send all values Send a timing value directly to a selected parameter Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At screen window select a parameter Step 3 At keypad press Time Delay or Speed as required followed by time value and then Enter Time value will appear in cell of selected parameter at screen window and be sent directly to selected channels Clear Timing screen of all values If timing values are cleared as opposed to zero existing timing information for that parameter in the luminaire will be left intact upon pressing Enter e Press Timing Clear located below touch screen Clear the value of any individual parameter Step 1 Select channels as required Step 2 At screen window select a parameter Step 3 At
233. licable Conventional Patch Window SD Taiti mga Locatia Oriara Specify lamp control Thumbwheel Address id Define channel range source preheat level Can be any number from 9 Position luminaire 1 2000 as long as it does not conflict with an existing address 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 31 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Patching VARIXLITE Luminaires Use this procedure to patch VARI LITE interface devices Series 300 luminaires and lamp power supplies Note This patch procedure does not work for VL2 or VL4 luminaires Series 200 luminaires must be patched using the DMX procedure Refer to Patching DMX Con ventional Fixtures on page 28 Step 1 At Plan View window icon bar select a VARI LITE luminaire icon as required Step 2 At desired location on plan view click to place icon Luminaire Patch window will open VL7 Icon VL6 Icon VLM Icon Displays as 2D or 3D i ion in wi Total Ch VL5 Icon configuration in window otal Channels ER a y 6 Clanen cation or zo BR Select h Object E 1d Ei Fr 1 i 1 e e 4 3 Channel Number Refer to 2D 3D Mode Guidelines on page 37 for more information _ Step 3 At luminaire Patch window do the following a At Device pop up menu specify luminaire profile type VL5 VL5Arc VL5B VL6 VL7 etc b At Address column enter appropriate channel thumbwheel and bulb thumbwheel information Thumbwheel addresse
234. ll step through all on line channels Intensity Intensity output can be controlled by the encoder marked Intensity This knob can be used to adjust the brightness of the luminaire s beam Six buttons to the right of the Intensity encoder are also associated with the intensity function Intensity also affects how a cue is stored however this topic will be discussed in more detail in Intensity States on page 110 e Full sets selected luminaires to full intensity 100 e Out sets selected luminaires to an out or inactive state no parameter data 0 level Mark sets selected luminaires to a marked state 0 level e Zero sets selected luminaires to zero intensity hard zero 0 Shutter Open is used with luminaire strobe or douser mechanisms e Shutter Close is used with luminaire strobe or douser mechanisms For a more in depth explanation refer to Intensity States on page 110 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 51 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 52 Note See Appendix A for mapping of the included DMX profiles Color Color can be controlled by the soft encoders when Color is selected These knobs can be used to adjust or change the hue and saturation of the beam s color The soft encoders will be mapped as follows Encoder 1 BLUE open close Encoder 2 AMBER open close Encoder 3 MAGENTA open close Encoder 4 WHEEL open close w Shift button presse
235. llowing At Device pop up menu specify fixture profile type b At Address column enter appropriate channel and thumbwheel informa tion c At Lamp Control column specify lamp source and preheat level as required Preheat values of O to 9 percent may be assigned for incandes cent luminaires d At Focus column define any special focus instructions as required to sync mirror fixtures for pan and tilt actions 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 29 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL e Do one of the following as required 1 2 Refer to next page for snapshot of Conventional Patch window Channel Assignment Channel which will control fixture Thumbwheel Address Can be any number from 1 2000 as long as it does not For automated luminaires use DMX Base Channel pop up menu to assign a DMX universe Enter luminaire DMX starting address in field beneath universe setting Ending address will be generated according to profile used For conventional luminaires in DMX Address column assign DMX universe Using range entry fields beneath display column add change or remove addresses Left field is for single channel entry To add scrollers click Add Scroller box beneath device popup menu In Scroller column assign a DMX universe Using range entry fields beneath display column add change or remove addresses Left field is for single channel entry Define 3D settings Select Profile or
236. look Step 2 Ensure that luminaires are in required intensity state refer to Intensity States on page 110 Step 3 Press Store lt Cue gt n Label Enter xxxxxx return store cue 52 Store Cue 52 Label Change a cue s label e lt Cue gt n Label Enter xxxxxx return Set label Cue 5 0 Se mw Modifying Unlike storing Presets Beams and Colors storing cue data into a cue number that already exists is a replacement action not an additive action Therefore any cue store operation will store the current stage look as defined by the intensity state To modify a cue recall the cue change the parameters as required and then re store it 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A BASIC QUES CREATING CUES 6 Deleting The delete function can be used to erase a stored cue Since this function does not route through the channel selects current channel selections are not affected When deleted the cue will also be removed from the cue list Note When Delete is pressed the keypad defaults to Cue mode Therefore the lt Cue gt button press is noted as optional Delete a cue e Delete lt Cue gt n Enter deletes the entire specified cue n Delete a channel from a cue Step 1 Recall cue Step 2 Select required channel Step 3 Press Out Step 4 Re store cue by pressing Store lt Cue gt n Enter where n is the discrete cue number
237. lts 50 60 Hz 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 Power Cable Lock IV ES Tighten screw to lock in place el E Retaining Bracket 330 VARE LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Channel Select Lamp Status Window Deselects current channels and selects all other patched channels Selects all active channels Selects all patched channels Selects all channels Clears all channel selections Millennium Button Routes control to first 1000 channels when not active or second 1000 when active 200 pop e oo eo uz ns rv v7 vo oo nooo as Selected button Century Buttons 0 900 Routes the 100 button array to one of ten pages E E which are in a marked state Selects all channels which are in a zero state Status Mimic Buttons Highlight buttons of channels in online active marked or zero status states 100 Button Array Represents a group of 100 channels as determined by the millennium and century buttons 02 9668 0001A Status Mimic Buttons Highlight corresponding channels on Channel Select panel All channels with active marked or zero intensity values or all up and running channels online can be viewed Lamp Control Buttons Allows hard soft reset of luminaires and start douse of arc lamps REFERENCE FOLD OUTS Selects corresponding channels at optional channel select panel just as identica
238. master An effect consists of programmable sets and sequences When assigned to a cue number the effect data is the only data stored with the cue 500 effects may be programmed numbered from 01 to 999 99 Changes orientation of rotating effect A beam altering mechanism available in some luminaires Sometimes called a prism wheel Timing values applied to an overall effect or its associated steps Each step in a sequence can be provided with a discrete attack time fade in sustain time hold decay fade out and step time Each effect can be provided with an overall fade in time fade out time duration and decay time The state a luminaire will assume if communication between the luminaire and the console is disrupted for more than 15 seconds Itis possible to have no emergency cue specified in which case the luminaire will fade to inactive or to have a Remain in State instruction in which case the luminaire will take no action Any cue can be specified as the emergency cue by using the Settings window A luminaire mechanism which allows framing of the light beam Control for frame is provided by the soft encoders Used to withhold data from a preset or a cue or to control what is recalled in a submaster or select Assignment of filters is a manual attribute If a cue is recorded with a filter in place the filter becomes a mask and is a recorded element in that cue Filters active during preset records will withhold t
239. meters e Filter Mode used to withhold or mask information from a preset or a cue and to control what is recalled in a submaster or select display e Dynamic State Mode used to apply pre packaged effects states of motion to channels or groups of channels to be stored as cues e Sneak Mode used to graphically display command line entries and to create manual control moves on the fly All four modes can be accessed at the console touch screen and or Timing window General Touch Screen Window Operations Operation of the timing filter feature from the touch screen available at the console front panel or the Timing window available from the Panels menu operate nearly identically Selecting Modes The mode or function is selected by pressing one of four buttons at the left of the touch screen or by clicking the appropriate tab at the top of the Timing window Only one mode is visible at a time although in the case of the filter mode it does not have to be visible for selected filters to affect console operation Setting Parameters Once a mode has been selected you can select parameters by touching the appropriate location on the screen itself or by clicking their boxes in the window and when necessary enter values using the command line keypad Depending on the mode Enter or To Cue must be pressed before settings will be applied to store or playback operations 02 9668 0001A 12 April
240. minimum and maximum control buttons are a OR provided to apply a default setting to selected E luminaires Like the soft encoders the e Se s functionality of these buttons depends on the currently selected function The min max buttons are initially programmed with a default console setting but can be reprogrammed with your own settings as required Instructions for programming new settings can be found in Storing New Default Min Max Settings on page 55 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL ENCODER CONTROL 3 Console Encoders When a luminaire is selected for manual control the encoders and buttons available on the console s front panel can be used to change its parameters Note Additional functions can be accessed by pressing the encoder Shift button located above Tilt encoder Pan and Tilt Pan and tilt are controlled by the two encoders marked Pan and Tilt respectively These knobs can be used to change the position of a luminaire s beam Three buttons above the Tilt encoder are also associated with pan and tilt functions e Flip causes selected luminaires to pan and tilt until the head is pointing in the same direction as before The head assembly pans 180 degrees and tilts as required so that the head points in the same direction DMX moving mirror luminaires will not respond to this command The Next and Last buttons wi
241. mmand line keypad e Press Macro n Enter where n is the discrete macro number e Press Macro Time n Enter where n is the discrete macro number recalls macro using time Recall macro via link e lt Cue gt n Link Macro x Enter links Macro x to Cue n e Board Cue n Link Macro x Enter links Macro x to Board Cue n 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 183 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Board Cues 184 Overview The board cue feature provides a method to record events on the console and play them back on command Board cues are similar to macros but are used primarily for recording playback operations in order to simplify complex cueing sequences for both spontaneous and scripted shows The board cue feature allows recording of all types of playback operations including submaster loading executing Go commands invoking filter states pressing stop buttons etc It also allows simultaneous playback on multiple submasters for the purpose of automating or scripting a complete show However board cues will not record any previously established submaster modes that may be in effect when the board cue is recorded Board cues like standard cues are stored as numbers which can be randomly accessed for modification or playback at any time The console can store up to 1 000 board cues numbered from 01 to 999 99 Board cues can also be given alpha numeric labels for identification D
242. mporting a Venue A 3D graphic file can be imported for use in the 3D Graphic window The file referred to as a venue is a representation of your venue or stage production as defined by 3D modeling parameters It can be created in any 3D modeling software package and then saved in the proper format for importing via the console s Zip drive The venue graphic is stored with the show file If a new venue is imported it will overwrite the previous venue in the show file The console can import the following file formats e 3dmf e 6 3df e dxf e dwg Note When importing files it is helpful to know the point of origin on which the 3D model is based although it can be determined in the event that this information is unavailable Import a venue Step 1 Insert Zip disk containing your 3D venue model into 4 Alpe Fil lid console Zip drive KAES impartido Beckground_ Clear 2D tact grand Pew YE Step 2 At File menu select Import Venue Step 3 At Open window select your 3D model file and click Choose View favorites Access a View previously network or server imported files Graphic Preview cm becthz zer 1141098 E LN gea Seni 11412708 E meras tada Bd mf 1211798 TL sheds venus Smt 11419408 ategn Zamir 11 20 98 Click to turn off 7 Leem preview feature tar bavenue n 11 19 88 Select 3D graphic file Click to import file into console s 3D Graphic window 256 12 April 01 0
243. mpty submaster Step 1 At keypad press cue number Must be valid cue number Step 2 At empty submaster press Load and then Go 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED CUE FEATURES ADVANCED CUE STORING AND MODIFYING 11 Cue Store Target Pressing Store Enter always defaults the store command to the last selected cue This cue is displayed in the command line display Selected Cue Store Enter will always re store this cue 52 set cue 52 Blwash Cue 52 Additionally when working with decimal cues it is not necessary to re enter the leading cue number For example e Store lt Cue gt 5 Enter store Cue 5 e Store lt Cue gt 5 3 Enter store Cue 5 3 e Store lt Cue gt 7 Enter store Cue 5 7 Cue Attribute Target For the currently selected cue see illustration above attribute instructions can be applied without re specifying the cue target For example To link another cue to the currently selected cue press Link n Enter where n is the linked cue To link a snapshot macro or effect to the currently selected cue press Link Macro n Enter where n is the number of the macro you wish to link Snap Shot or Effect can be used instead of Macro To add a wait trail time out time or loop to the currently selected cue press Wait n Enter where n is desired time or number of loops also Trail Out Time
244. mul D p Defines Set Defines Sequence SE Timing Information covered in Advanced Direction Mode Cycle and Start attributes Effects chapter 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 133 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 134 Storing Effects as Cues Effects can also be stored as cues using the Link feature This will allow you to embed an effect into the cue list The effect will be linked to a standard cue number and will be treated as a cue by the submasters during playback Any advanced cue attributes can be applied to the effect cue just as any standard cue Refer to cue storing instructions throughout this manual Store an effect as a cue e Store lt Cue gt n Link Effect x Enter stores effect x into the specified cue number n Current stage look is not included Store an effect as a cue and label When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard e Store lt Cue gt n Link Effect x Label xxxxxx return 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS PLAYBACK 7 Playback Basic Playback Refer to Fold Out G After creating an effect it can be played back using a submaster Unless a duration or cycle count is specified the effect will run until stopped Play an effect Step 1 At keypad press Effect n Enter or select an effect at Effect Select display It will be displayed by number and
245. n by selecting a single Preset and clicking on the Data drop down window button all its parameter data can be viewed The Value V button will display the numeric value which has been stored into each parameter The Dynamic D will display any associated dynamic state information The V and D toggle buttons allow you to display one or both types of information in the window Open Preset Data window e At Data menu select Preset Data Associated Filters Associated Channels Label Preset Number Data Drop Down Window Displays data for selected Preset Value Displays value that 353 266 luminaire is reporting 153 764 for the parameters when 701 754 selected E Dynamic Displays dynamic state information when selected Opens Parameter Columns window which is used to choose which columns appear in window Refer to Parameter Columns Window on page 61 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 85 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 86 Storing Modifying and Recalling Presets From Panel Select Displays Note When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Store a new preset using Presets select display Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Ensure Presets are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Using manual controls set all required parameters Step 4 Filter attributes as requ
246. n the console 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Update Upfade Time VARIXLITE Color System Venue Wait Time Wave Time Zero 02 9668 0001A GLOSSARY R An advanced store modify function which is used to store modified channels back into their source cues or to add new channels to cues Update is not routed through channel or filter selections A timing value associated with channel intensity settings The up fade time affects the intensity transition in the event the transition is in an upward direction A default color palette available via the Vari Lite Color System window or command line keypad which is based on the numbering system for VARI LITE colors A representation of your venue or stage production as defined by 3D modeling param eters A timing attribute that can be applied to a cue causing the next event to be automati cally executed after the wait time has elapsed The wait time begins counting from the moment the cue is executed The next event being either the next sequence cue a linked cue or a linked macro The time it will take an effect to loop back to the beginning A wave time can only be greater than the total sequence time i e the wave time will never cut a sequence short only add a gap before the sequence starts again An intensity state of zero hard zero 0 level A luminaire that is zero will only store intensity data which is stored as a hard zero 0 level along with the lumi
247. naire time or by manually pressing Enter This would allow you to sneak in a move that was not originally programmed during playback of a show In addition by using the command line keypad Sneak button it is also possible to sneak to a preset Sneak Mode Button Push to display sneak parameters in touch Misc 1 2 and 3 Used with DMX fixtures which have extra control mapped into their profiles such as control channels that need a value screen e E Index Misct TIMING Wheel Framin i Magen Strobe Prism i eee eer A IL F IE CIBIG INTEN FOCUS COLOR BEAM EDGE GOBO GA ENTER NOS y 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 153 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Sneak Mode Values Sneak parameter data is entered using the touch screen window and Sneak button After the sneak operation has been defined pressing the Enter button will cause all selected luminaires to move into the new parameter values defined in the screen window Values are entered numerically at the keypad DMX Controllable Luminaires Time is entered in minutes and seconds or seconds and tenths of seconds Maximum time entry is 59 59 Refer to Time Speed Formats on page 142 Use discrete numbers from the following ranges for parameter values DMX Controllab
248. ndow During a record operation the console will map all appropriate front panel actions to the registered timecode as those events take place Unless specified otherwise the internal clock will begin counting at 00 00 00 00 Timecode has four fields 00 00 00 00 or AA BB CC DD e AA hours 00 24 BB minutes 00 through 59 Status Stopped E e CC seconds 00 through 59 Taje ok ok 00 00 e DD frames 00 through 29 SATa EA O External DO A CO 30 Drop internal Q3 030 Non Drop Synchronizing Protocol To prevent unexpected interruptions in the MIDI execution of events a synchronizing protocol is built into the system This feature can be turned off and on using the Timecode Autoswitch checkbox at the Settings window refer to Settings Window on page 245 During normal operations the system will wait for each timecode frame before performing the required calculations for each time period If the incoming timecode arrives approximately on time and the frame number agrees with the expected time from the system internal clock the system remains synchronized with the external timecode If the system begins receiving frames which are outside of the above timing tolerance the following occurs e Ifthe Timecode Autoswitch is enabled and the system is synchronized awaiting the next frame and the expected frame is not received within 2 frames the board will begin running on its internal time clock 02 9668 0001
249. nel range 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 47 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Lamp Control Fold Out C Start Start will function for all arc luminaires with remote start capability S Start lamps using Start button Step 1 Select luminaire s for manual control Tank Progress Step 2 Set luminaire s in recommended starting position Vase e according to manufacturer s specifications Jud Select Parkai Step 3 Press Start QuickForus Aiapntai omar Start lamps from menu bar Step 1 Select luminaire s for manual control Eet aie Detik PE p e SC tda Cnnfgeraben Su Step 2 Set luminaire s in recommended starting position Stara Ge ergeg according to manufacturer s specifications EES f Laid Dat e Fil D Step 3 At Special menu select Start e ON x 7 ESAS Lamp Reset Start Arm Douse Next S ze KE Status Online Active Mark Zero UA AS A Al Ne O O TOS O SS On Quick Man qf y Man Focus Undo 7 Time Douse Douse will function for all arc luminaires with remote douse Speci Douse capability tear tenes eters Douse lamps using Douse button ue A heiert Parked Step 1 Select luminaire s for manual control QaickForus Mansi Domain Step 2 Press Arm Douse Seng Douse lamps from menu bar KEE igdate Configeration FU Step 1 Select luminaire s for manual control Stare Combgu
250. ng values may be stored into a preset Changes to presets track auto matically into any cues in which they were used A console mode wherein all actions taken are stored to the appropriate luminaires but are not executed on stage Also see Live Editing This console serves as the main system console It stores the show file and retains overall submaster control A beam altering mechanism available in some luminaires Sometimes called an effects wheel QuickFocus allows stepping through a selected preset one channel at a time to verify its parameter data At the conclusion of a QuickFocus operation all luminaires are brought to the proper position allowing the preset to be modified if required Allows data to be modified across a range of presets and cues Range editing is provided for modifying parameter attributes timing information and cue data Range editing allows targets to be selected for modification by particular attributes i e channels in a particular state could be selected and told to assume some other state not necessarily via the same parameter Allows the recorded time speed attributes for luminaires to be manually adjusted Rate adjustments from 0 to 999 may be provided to a board cue a cue or effect Rate adjustments can be added to the cue attributes for later recall The default setting of 100 is defined as real time Rates higher than 100 will cause faster playback of events while rates lower than 100
251. nk controlling during playback 242 storing 194 Live mode 14 264 Log console 14 274 Loop using 195 Luminaire Status window 60 M Macintosh computer console description 6 Macro overview 92 178 recalling 183 12 April 01 325 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL recording 179 window 181 291 Manual assign submaster 234 Manual control 3D 50 53 ad hoc groups 161 beam 50 52 color 50 52 copy channel 164 dynamic state 50 53 frame 50 54 image 50 52 intensity 50 51 pan tilt 50 51 soft encoders 50 timing 162 Manual timing using 162 Masking 147 MIDI notes 287 overview 285 synchronizing 289 timecode overview 289 timecode recording 290 with board cues 184 Min Max settings soft encoder 55 Mode effect 120 indicator 14 264 live 14 264 preview 14 264 Multi console backup console 249 configuring 250 primary 249 primary disable 251 secondary 249 N Naming console 23 250 Next Last with channel selection 47 O Off Line programming 252 Online checking status 34 Orientation 326 dynamic state 150 Out time using 197 D Palette shift using 69 Pan 50 51 Parameter Columns window 61 Park using 163 Parts 117 118 Patch DMX Conventional fixtures 28 editing 35 enabling 25 exporting 272 importing 273 on off indicator 14 25 overview 25 procedure 32 window 36 Plan View window 2D mode 27 37 3D mode 27 35 37 background picture 27 editing in 35 grid spacing 27 p
252. nt of a media that does not meet Vari Lite s limited warranty and is returned at your expense along with a copy of your receipt to Vari Lite customer support or to Vari Lite s authorized representative If replacement of the media is not reasonably practical or commercially reasonable as determined solely in the discretion of Vari Lite Vari Lite will refund the purchase price as evidenced by a purchase receipt Vari Lite will have no responsibility to replace media damaged by accident abuse or misapplication EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING THE SOFTWARE AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ADDITIONAL WARRANTY OF ANY KIND AND VARI LITE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF DESIGN MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR TITLE ANY WARRANTIES ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE OR ANY WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY S PATENT S TRADE SECRET S COPYRIGHT S OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS VARI LITE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE VARI LITE DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCU
253. nt is specified the linked event will execute after the wait trail time has elapsed Note In the following examples Trail could be used instead of Wait Store a cue with a wait trail time e Store lt Cue gt n Wait m Enter stores Cue n with a wait time of m Store a cue with a link and a wait trail time e Store lt Cue gt n Link x Wait m Enter stores Cue n and provides an out of sequence link to Cue x with a wait time of m Add a wait trail time to an existing cue e lt Cue gt n Wait x Enter adds a wait time of x for Cue n Add a wait trail time to a range of cues e lt Cue gt m Thru t Wait x Enter adds the specified wait time x to all of the cues in the specified cue range m thru t Remove a wait trail time from a cue e lt Cue gt n Wait Enter removes the wait time from the specified Cue n Remove a wait trail time and link from a cue e lt Cue gt n Link Wait Enter removes both the wait and link instruction for the specified Cue n 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Shortcut gt Out Time Shortcut gt ADVANCED CUE FEATURES SPECIAL CUE ATTRIBUTES 11 Remove a wait trail time from a range of cues e lt Cue gt n thru t Wait Enter removes the wait or trail time from the specified cue range n thru t To add a wait trail time to the currently selected cue press Wait n Enter where n is the desired time or Trail
254. o that it always prints on a single page Print Setup The Print window dialogue is a standard Macintosh interface which allows you to configure the printing options In the case of the special windows noted above which have two sections the Virtuoso software adds four extra options Depending on the printer these options may be displayed in a slightly different manner in the Print window but they will always be available These options are Summary Current Data All Data and Data From To Refer to Print window graphic on next page For Example Summary Would print a list of all Macros in order but no Step data would be included All Data Would print the Macro number and all Step data for every Macro one per page Data From To Would print all data for the specified range Current Data gt eet i Would print the Step data for ze Parsons hiri amarar 2 tah ia Inda 7 the currently selected Macro 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 275 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL To print Step 1 Ensure that window you wish to print data from is open and currently active Step 2 At File menu select Print Step 3 At Print window configure options If printing from a special Virtuoso window see previous page select which data you wish to print Step 4 Click Print Show File Messager Eme A Copy Imtrer 30 bheckaroung EE rem Vena Import Venue Terpuji
255. ode The submaster Track mode specifies which submaster the cue sheet will follow The window selection will reflect the active cue in the submaster selected at the Track pull down menu When cues are loaded or advanced in that submaster the Cue Sheet window will reflect the changes Submasters Autoload When the Autoload box is checked in the Cue Sheet window any selected cue will automatically load and play in the submaster specified in the Track pull down menu Autoload Checkbox Track Pull Down Menu Selected cues will automatically Specifies a submaster for window tracking load and play when box is checked kapars nr 1 eparaor PESEEEES EES Submaster Stop Step A running cue can be stopped using the Stop Step button Step 1 Press Stop Step to stop a running autofollow Step 2 Press Run to resume playback with autofollows 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 211 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Cue Data Cue parameter data can be viewed and edited in the Cue Data window This window displays each stored cue one at a time with Frocet fete its parameter values in a user definable format arde Beam Palette ada Note Cue data can only be edited if Patch editing is disabled View Edit Cue Data Cue Data Step 1 At Data menu select Cue Data Cue Data window will MD open bram Petene Data Step 2 Once window is open Enable Cue Editing menu option will be available as long as patch
256. ode Cycle Start Wave Time Cycles S Belly Ai 21 orward Run Breet Simul 1 05 1 01 1 01 F Muepop 41 22 Aerward Aun Break Simul H d 0 03 D I z a Ripple 21 16 Fethard Aun Breet Simul 5 rardomspakes 22 16 Random Aun Breet Simul D FR iei h 27 11 F rewrg Aun Break Simul 220 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A ADVANCED EFFECTS FEATURES EFFECT TIMING Cycle Count In lieu of a duration time a total cycle count can be provided in the Cycles column of the window This number will specify how many times the set runs through the sequence After running the specified number of times the effect will stop and await manual restarting or go to the next event Sequence Level Timing Timing attributes are available on a sequence level to control the step attack sustain and decay for each step in the sequence Note When cues are included in sequences the cue times will override step attack times unless timing is disabled by the filters e Step Time the time between activation of a step and the next sequential step This can also be controlled on a universal level in the effects timing attributes refer to Effect Level Timing on page 219 e Attack Time transition time between current luminaire state and state dictated by the step action e Sustain Time how long the channels will execute the action e Decay Time transition time out of a step into a background state This is used only in a situation where th
257. ollowing e Preset e Edge e Color Palette e Frost e Beam Palette e Zoom e Intensity e Strobe e Pan e Gobo Wheel e Tilt e Gobo Index e Blue e Rotating Gobo Amber e Effects Wheel e Magenta e Effects Index e Color Wheel e Prism e Beam e Stop Flag Note If overlapping parameters are specified only the last action will be used 126 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS CREATING EFFECTS 7 From Effects Control Panel Create a sequence 9 tte est e Step 1 At Effects Control press Seq Selects will oe display Sequences Steps and Presets Sequences BRAF ONO QO Step 2 At Sequences select display select a sequence to create Step 3 Add a preset to a step a At Steps display press and hold a Step Select Button use 11 20 Steps b At Presets select press Preset Select Button of preset you wish to add and release Step Select Button a O Tooge Step 4 Add color or beam to a step H Oe GI a Change Presets select to Colors or Beams Presets b At Steps display press and hold a Step EEEIEE Select Button use 11 20 Pre ers c At select press Select Button of color or beam you w
258. or each console that opens a single show file When a new show file is created the console ID number will always be 1 one e Physical Ring The System Configuration window represents your system s physical ring of devices The consoles and devices are displayed and connected by cabling lines in their actual order in the system If a device is off line or not communicating this will be reflected by a break in the ring NIF Icon The NIF icon is displayed in color with an indication to show if the DMX board is not online If the box in the right hand corner is red the board is not online or not installed Console Naming The console naming feature is useful when two consoles are connected to a single system also refer to Setting Up a Backup Console on page 249 to identify each console For example you could name the consoles Main and Backup For each console the name is displayed in its Versions window and underneath its System Configuration icon Note A console displays its own name in bold print underneath the icon All others will appear in regular print Name a console Step 1 At System Configuration window double click e e faut Vir icon of console to be named or at Virtuoso icon ici Ereti Coniala menu select Config as Secondary Consola abres eg Primary Trea eir Versions Versions window will open Step 2 At name field type console name Step 3 Close window Name can be chan
259. oso icon menu select Versions Versions window will open Step 2 At name field type console name Step 3 Close window 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SYSTEM SETUPS MULTI CONSOLE FEATURES 14 Disable Console The disable feature is used to disable the console s front panel and graphic interface ability A disabled console will still provide status feedback sync submasters and appear in the System Config window but all user control is temporarily disabled Note Any primary or secondary console can be disabled as required Disable a console e Atconsole to be disabled at Virtuoso Icon menu select Disable Console Kees Re enable a console a Ca e At console to be re enabled at Virtuoso Icon menu select Enable Console 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 251 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Off Line Programming 252 Performing Off Line Programming The off line programming feature allows preprogramming without having to connect to a system When in the off line mode all menus and windows are accessible just as 1f the system were online The only apparent difference is found in the System Configuration window which will not display any device icons except for the console while in the Off Line mode Note The off line feature does not eliminate the need for a console The Visionary 3D application is available for programming off line without a console Set console to Off line Mode A aut Vi
260. ot work for either the Virtuoso Virtuoso Tech or Virtuoso DX consoles Since the panels of the Virtuoso DX and Virtuoso Tech console are part of one panel they are not as clearly defined Control areas that may be included in a snapshot are as seen in the console graphic e Channel Select panel stores the page and current selected channels When the snapshot is recalled it is displayed at the Channel Select window and Channel Select panel if applicable e Manual Control panel stores the current encoder status and Select Display configuration including bank and page selection as well as active states such as QuickFocus and Manual Timing e Playback panel stores the keyboard display setup and mode status and selections with the Touch Screen e Submaster states stores the current state of any or all submasters This includes active submaster banks 1 10 11 20 21 30 made at the Submasters drop down section The submaster control settings function filters rates operating modes the active and pending cues etc are all saved as part of the snapshot e Effects panel stores the state of the effects control buttons and the state of the Select Displays in effect mode e Monitor 1 stores the windows layout on monitor 1 e Monitor 2 stores the windows layout on optional monitor 2 e Monitor 3 stores the windows layout on optional monitor 3 e Monitor 4 stores the windows layout on optional monitor 4 02 9668 0001
261. pdate function key 167 presets 87 using 203 with submasters 207 V VARI LITE luminaires patching 32 Venue 3D exporting 257 importing 256 new 255 point of origin 259 size 255 W Wait time using 196 Windows closing 13 entering editing data 12 interaction 12 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Virtuoso DX Console Overview Console Components Channel Select Monitor Panel Optional CD DVD Drive Used to upgrade Virtuoso software Zip Drive Used for backing up and importing show file data Macintosh G4 Computer Console Desk Pull Out Keyboard Keyboard Lock Unlock Lock Turn Counter Clockwise Unlock Turn Clockwise 02 9668 0001A REFERENCE FOLD OUTS Board Cue Macro Record Buttons used to start board cue Channel Select Controls or macro record sequence Buttons for recalling channels riveiPraview Buttons at various Intensity states Configures console for either Lamp amp Status Controls Live or Preview mode operation Buttons for start douse of lamps reset Touch Screen Display recalling luminaire status and special Used to access Timing Filters Sub Rate Encoder functions such as Quick Focus Dynamic State and Sneak features Used to set submaster playback rate Effects Controls Sub Mode Buttons Used along with Select Displays Used to set submaster to create and edit effects modes
262. phic into either the up down or right left mode Release button and press again to move graphic in a different direction e Hold down left trackpad button and ES button while using trackpad to zoom in or out e Hold down left trackpad button and o button while using trackpad to rotate venue e Hold down left trackpad button and button to bring up camera focus crosshairs Clicking somewhere within the graphic with these crosshairs will refocus the camera angle to that center point Note One method of speeding up 3D graphic performance is to limit the number of channels and therefore their associated luminaires which are displayed in the 3D Graphic window at any one time Refer to Display Filters on page 248 The following quick keys can be used with the 3D Graphic window to adjust the camera angle 4 6 left right direction also arrow keys 8 2 up down also arrow keys 7 9 zoom in zoom out also 262 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 3D GRAPHIC DISPLAY 3D DisPLAY WINDOW 15 3D Graphic Settings Appearance aspects of the 3D graphic can be adjusted using the Settings window Using 3D Settings window e At 3D graphic window click on Settings button Using cursor drag sliders to adjust settings as desired Adjusts overall brightness of the 3D venue Adjusts the brightness of the light source Adjusts the shade of the emanating from the left side of the window 3D window backarouid This p
263. play press Bank Function Bckgrnd Step Window will change to Background screen Change Bank BckGrnd Step STEPS Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 BckGrnd select page to exit Step 3 Define background state as follows a Press and hold Step select button 11 below background state b At bottom select display choose a color preset beam etc and release Step select button 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 129 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL From Sequences Window Define a background state Step 1 Select a sequence Step 2 At Background State pop up menu select an action Use pop up menu to define a background state For example Preset Then enter Preset s number in the field amns O OO Seg Label 522 Background State Pe a Action Arten w ie w Di EE 130 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS CREATING EFFECTS 7 Creating Effects Effects can be created using the command line keypad Effects Control panel or Effects window When creating effects the current settings for the Direction Mode and Start buttons will be stored upon a store operation For creating basic effects you can use the default direction mode and start selections The default timing settings can also be used In this case without a specific duration time the effect will run until it is stopped or another event replaces it in the submaster Duration and cycles will be cov
264. plying Filters To Color Select Filters can be applied to Color select store operations if the system default setting is changed accordingly Refer to Settings Window on page 245 for instructions on setting this default Store colors as usual using filters as required Applying Filters To a Submaster When a filter is applied to a submaster the associated parameter data will be withheld from playback in the case of an effect or unmasked cue Applying a filter to a submaster may force the playback of masked parameters of a cue Note For more detailed instructions on using the submaster Function Filter feature refer to Function Filter on page 232 Apply filters to a submaster Step 1 Set filters as required Func Step 2 At submasters panel press Func Filter Choose of required submaster Clear filters from submaster Step 1 Clear all filter selections Step 2 Press Func Filter Choose at submaster to clear 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 149 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Dynamic State Mode 150 Overview Dynamic states are pre packaged actions states of motion which can be applied to channels or groups of channels and then stored in cues They provide a quick way of creating cues with luminaire actions such as Figure 8 s Ballyhoos and Circles Note A channel may have multiple dynamic states provided they are not conflicting Dynamic Mode Button Push to display dynamic stat
265. ponents These tests will not affect any of the data in your luminaires CAUTION These diagnostics are not intended to be used during performance condi tions as they will interrupt system operation Once the console is in diagnostic mode the top select display will list all test options and the submasters display window will provide a graphic of the console front panel in order to register button presses for the purpose of testing The diagnostic mode provides the following tests and functions 02 9668 0001A Display Test illuminates all front panel displays and touch screen to an equal intensity and allows stepping through four levels for testing The four level are as follows 1 Bright 2 Dimmed 3 Mid 4 Out SRAM Test checks console RAM and reports any problems LEDs On turns on all front panel button LEDs Switch Latch toggles LED testing function so that pressing buttons either turns LEDs on or off Either way any button presses will be highlighted in the console graphic in the Submasters display FireWire Test tests FireWire connection and reports any problems Erase Flash erases console flash Reset returns console to normal state of operation 12 April 01 281 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Diagnostic Mode Operation Use the following procedures and guideline to test console functions To power up console in diagnostic mode Step 1 At rear of console turn off power swit
266. py and paste rules will apply Selection e To select a cell click on it e To extend or shrink the current cell selection s in a rectangular fashion hold down or and click on another cell e To add or remove a specific cell hold down Gy and click on that cell Copying e Any selection may be copied to the clipboard All lines of every selected cell are placed on the clipboard Value Parameter Source Timing Dynamic This includes lines that you may have hidden by using the Parameter Columns window Pasting General e When data is pasted into a cell all contents of the destination cell are completely replaced with the contents of the cell on the clipboard The exception would be if data for a line is out of range in which case it is ignored However only those particular lines that are out of range are ignored The rest of the cell pastes normally e Any parameter may be pasted over any other parameter Range checking will be performed to prevent data corruption In general it is not possible to edit copy or paste any parameter column that is not in the table The exception is the Focus and Color columns Pasting into one of these columns is equivalent to pasting the same cell into ALL of its component columns This will occur whether or not the component columns have been selected in the Parameter Columns window Pasting One To Many e If only one cell is resident on the clipboard the contents of that one c
267. r 1 WHEEL SPIN Encoder 2 ROTATING SPIN Encoder 3 ROTATE Encoder 4 EFFECTS SPIN Encoder 5 EFFECTS ROTATE Encoder 6 ZOOM Store a new min max setting Step 1 Press button for required set of soft encoder functions It will be mapped to soft encoders Step 2 Select luminaires to be included in min max setting For example select some VL6 luminaires Step 3 Step 4 Using encoders adjust parameter for new setting Press Store Encoder Min Max Button Setting is now stored for those channels 02 9668 0001A Special color encoder functions Encoder 1 VL7 PLATE 1 COLOR or VL2 WHEEL 1 Encoder 2 VL7 PLATE 1 SATURATION or VL2 WHEEL 2 Encoder 3 VL7 PLATE 2 COLOR Encoder 4 VL7 PLATE 2 SATURATION Soft Encoder A Adjusts parameters as determined by current function selection For example controls Gobo because Image is currently selected Min Max Control Button Activates default min max settings or can be stored with new settings Intensity Encoder Adjusts intensity in selected luminaire s Function Popup Menu Encoder Controls Max Min Buttons Intensity Buttons ES Shutter Buttons Open Close Pan Tilt Flip Button Specifies which submaster will track Channel Increment cue Buttons Selected Cue Effect Indicator Function Filter Grid Increment Indicator 12 April 01 Window N On Id REFERENCE FOLD OUT
268. r fader is set at 50 Cue 56 will play back at an intensity level of 12 5 238 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS PLAYBACK INTENSITY LEVEL 13 Intensity Transitions When playing back cues with intensity transitions timed fades the submaster fader can be used to scale the intensity output e Ifthe fader is set before the transition occurs the entire transition will be scaled accordingly For example if a timed fade of 10 seconds is defined between Cue 1 which has a stored intensity value of 0 and Cue 2 which has a stored intensity value of 100 then setting the submaster fader at 50 before the transition occurs would result in a 10 second fade from 0 intensity to 50 intensity 10 second Cue 1 0 SE w Cue 2 100 0 50 Submaster Fader Set to 50 e If the fader is moved during the transition the remaining portion of the transition will be scaled accordingly For example if a timed fade of 10 seconds is defined between Cue 1 which has an intensity value of 0 and Cue 2 which has an intensity value of 100 and the fader is dropped to 50 halfway through the transition then the result would be a 5 second fade from 0 intensity to 50 intensity followed by a 3 second fade from 50 intensity to 75 intensity 5 seconds 5 seconds Cue 1 0 B Cue 2 100 0 75 Submaster Fader Move to 50 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 239 VARI LITE
269. r will be recalled e If Manual Timing is enabled refer to Manual Timing on page 162 then the current time information in the luminaires will be recalled For example if focus has a time of 10 seconds and color has a time of 5 seconds then the luminaire will recall the parameters using those individual times Note The system assumes that data to be recalled is from a cue As such use of the lt Cue gt button is optional Recall stored cue data Step 1 At touch screen display select Filter mode Select parameters to be recalled Step 2 If timing is desired press Man Time Step 3 Select channel s as required Step 4 Press Recall lt Cue gt m Enter All stored data will be recalled from the specified cue m for the selected luminaires as dictated by the selections on the filters 12 April 01 205 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Recall stored preset data Step 1 At touch screen display select Filter mode Using touch screen select parameters to be recalled Step 2 If timing is desired press Man Time Step 3 Select channel s as required Step 4 Press Recall Preset x Enter or Recall Preset Select Button All stored data will be recalled from the specified preset x as defined by the selections on the filters Undo a Delete Command In addition to reversing Store and Update commands the Undo feature can be used to Eb reverse a Delete command Undo reverse
270. ralian Hear fared Corligaralian Step 2 At Special menu select Douse Lead Partiines Lind Epi Filter D Mart 48 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL LAMP CONTROL 3 Reset Recalibration Erase Luminaire Data Two different types of luminaire resets are available e Recalibrate returns luminaire to default home position based on profile and re downloads data e Reset activates reset command if supported by luminaire and profile and re downloads data Erase Luminaire Data clears all data from a luminaire s on board RAM and disk AN CAUTION Erase Luminaire Data command removes all show data from the show file for selected channels There is NO undo available Recalibrate luminaires using Reset button Step 1 Select luminaires for manual control Step 2 Press Arm Reset Reset luminaires using Reset button Step 1 Select luminaires for manual control Step 2 Press Arm Reset Reset press Reset button twice while holding down Arm button Reset Recalibrate Erase Luminaire Data from menu bar Sep Tank Progress Step 1 Select required channels ti Step 2 At Special menu select Reset Recalibrate or Set Parked Erase Luminaire Data OeickForus anual Timing States Reset VARI KLITE luminaires from System Configuration window rset Seralibrete frase Luimiliie Step 1 At System Configuration window double click icon of luminaire to be reset or recalibrated Device Info win
271. rame e Rotate encoder by clicking and holding mouse button and then moving left or right Release mouse button when desired encoder setting 1s reached e Currently selected cue effect and increment setting are indicated at bottom portion of window Function Popup Menu Encoder Controls Max Min Buttons Intensity Buttons Shutter Buttons SE Pan Tilt Flip Button Specifies which submaster will track Channel Increment cue Buttons Increment Indicator Selected Cue Effect _ Indicator Function Filter Grid Macro Board Cue Record Button 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A MANUAL CONTROL KEYPAD CONTROL 3 Keypad Control old Out Overview The control or command line keypad also provides control of luminaires Luminaire parameters can be programmed from the keypad just as they can from the manual control encoders although in most cases the touch screen Sneak function is also required This section will cover all manual controls that can be executed using the command line keypad alone Advanced manual control using the keypad will be discussed along with the Sneak function in Timing Filter Displays chapter on page 137 Entries made with the keypad are referred to as command line entries and will be displayed in the command line display as they are entered Command line entry guidelines e When entering command lines it is not necessary to specify channel information if the required ch
272. rates 290 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SHOW CONTROL BY EXTERNAL DEVICES MIDI SMPTE TIMECODE 1 Timecode Scripts Window The content of timecode scripts can be viewed in the Timecode Scripts window The Delete Replace Punch In and Insert features allow editing so that an entire script does not have to be re recorded in order to make a change The Time column may also be edited To allow creation of multiple scripts only the selected script will be run Note The Punch In feature bases the new steps events on the previous timecode and does not record based on external timecode Therefore it may be necessary to edit the times manually once the new section is added e To open at Data menu select Timecode Scripts Cue Daba Preset Deia Color Pie De Data Be am Palette Data e Click on Steps drop down arrow to view content of steps e Edit as necessary Selected Script E HU DU Ce Stop Record PERES 00 00 00 Ce Cerpg 000 Teg C Punch In ng ner Cer O0 Den Delete OOS ODE Seba duber 1 Replace 4 DD 02 27 Fun Subraster DO DA4 DE Lol aer Insert k DD CO 04 Go Subereater 1 Timing information this information can be edited Delete a step Step 1 Using trackpad select step s to be deleted Step 2 Click on trash can icon Step s will be removed Replace a step Step 1 Using trackpad select step to be replaced Step 2 Click replace icon Step 3 At desk perform replacement action The first
273. re intensity value of 50 Example 2 If a channel is assigned while its intensity value is at 50 the submaster fader will have control of only half of the luminaire s potential intensity output scaled appropriately to the fader s full range Subsequently reducing the submaster fader from 100 to 50 would result in a luminaire intensity value of 25 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 235 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL BdCmd Dsbl 236 Bump When in Bump mode pressing the submaster s Select button will instantly bump to the full intensity provided by the cue as modified by the fader position Bump intensity of active cue to 100 Step 1 Press Bump along with Choose button for required submaster Submaster is now in Bump mode and Select will begin flashing Step 2 Press Select to bump intensity Release submaster from Bump mode e Press Bump Choose at submaster to clear Board Command Disable The Board Command Disable feature causes any linked snapshots macros or autofollows to be ignored during playback of any cue This feature can be useful for recalling the core data for any cue Apply Board Command Disable to a submaster e Press BdCmd Disable along with Choose button for required submaster Release Board Command Disable mode e Press Clear along with Choose button of associated submaster to clear submaster of all modes 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS PLAY
274. re mapped to hard encoders Sends luminaires back to their home position and reloads cue data 12 April 01 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Speed Start Step Step Effect Store Submaster Synchronized Template Timing Timing Disable Timing Mode 3D Location Touch Screen Display Track Fill Trail Time Undo 318 The rate of change of a luminaire s variable parameters As opposed to time e g 5 seconds speed is how fast the parameters will move To energize a luminaire arc lamp applies to arc lamp luminaires only To advance a halted stopped effect to its next step A component of an effect sequence Steps specify what action the applied set groups of lights are to take in an effect Also see Sequence To save any intensity value parameter attribute group selection or timing informa tion into a specified target e g cue select display preset etc A playback device that can be used to execute cues board cues and effects Cues include luminaire target states crossfades and effects In handling MIDI timecode from an external source synchronized is when incoming timecode arrives approximately on time and the frame number agrees with the expected time from the system s internal clock Stored settings for touch screen filter timing and sneak modes Settings are recalled from the Macro Template select display Control of the duration of change for a luminaire
275. re now selected c At Preset section click inside Preset 2 box Luminaires in 3D Graphic window will move to Preset 2 Preset Section Click inside box 2 to select preset It LS t3 ta LE 1a r 18 14 zi Note When a parameter is not filtered i e highlighted in Filter screen its data would be transferred during any subsequent store or recall operations 2 Filter all parameters except pan and tilt focus as follows a At Panels menu select Timing Display b At Timing Display window click Filter tab e Click Clear button to deselect all parameters gt Click in Pan and Tilt boxes to select for data transfer only pan tilt data will be stored in the preset Filter Tab Clears all selections F pa ear T 3 TT e Select Pan and Tilt Filters Sends settings to preset cue store operations 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 305 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 3 Apply a Vari Lite color as follows At Operation menu select VL Color System b AtVL Color System window scroll down and select Dark Blue ID 374 Refer to Ch 4 of Virtuoso Operators Manual for more detailed instructions c Click Send button to send color data to luminaires Select color Click to send color to selected channels luminaires 4 Refocus luminaires using 3D Point of Interest mode as follows a At3D Graphic window select Point of Interest mode by clicking target icon b Point target at figure standing cen
276. record function can be initiated from the keypad Timing can be specified using command line entry When Enter is pressed the Macro Rec button will flash indicating that the recording function is enabled Pressing Macro Rec after this will disable the record function in the event you need to abort the action Record a macro When labeling the xxxxxx is entered on the alpha numeric keyboard The return button is also located on the keyboard Step 1 Press Store Macro Enter Step 2 Enter sequence of button presses display selections or command line entries Step 3 Press Store Macro n Enter or Store Macro n Label Enter xxxxxx return where n is the number of the macro select where you wish to store the recorded sequence Record a macro for timed playback Step 1 Press Store Macro Enter Step 2 Enter sequence of button presses display selections or command line entries Step 3 Press Store Macro n Time Enter where n is the number of the macro select where you wish to store the recorded sequence Specify timing for a previously recorded macro e Macro n Time Enter where n is the discrete macro number From Encoders Window Macro or board cue recording can also be initiated from the Encoders window Use Rec button to begin a macro record operation as follows Click to Rec begin Macro recording Hold button and click Rec to begin Boar
277. reen to deselect The parameter grids at the screen command line display and submaster displays indicate the filtered or non filtered state of each parameter The Filter To Cue button must be pressed before the command line or submasters grids will reflect the filter settings e When none of a parameter s I F E C B G attributes are filtered its box is highlighted e When some of a parameter s attributes are filtered the box is gray e When all of a parameter s attributes are filtered its box is clear e After adjusting the filter settings the filters can be applied to preset or cue store and playback functions All attributes filtered Some attributes filtered No attributes filtered ay MF 1 store cue 1 CENA Store Cue 1 Label z Applying Filters To Cues The Filter To Cue button is used to apply filters to a cue store operation Using filters while storing cues Step 1 Set filters as required Step 2 Press filter To Cue The filter state will be applied to all cues stored from this point on until changed Step 3 Store cue as usual refer to Storing on page 112 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS FILTER MODE 3 Applying Filters To Beam Select Filters can be applied to Beam select store operations Beam selects will store information based on the filters set in the Beam Gobo and Edge columns of the Filter window Ap
278. res able to achieve the color will do so Luminaires unable to achieve color will go to black except for VL6 luminaires which go to white Send colors using window and keyboard Step 1 Select required channels Step 2 Using cursor sort list by Color ID or Gel Step 3 At keyboard type in first few letters of color ID number or Gel number Selection will be highlighted in window Step 4 Press keyboard Enter button to send From Keypad The command line keypad can also be used to assign VARI LITE colors to selected luminaires The color number entered on the keypad corresponds to the colors listed in the VARIXLITE Color System Charts starting on the next page Examples e lt Chan gt n Vari Lite Color m Enter applies VARIXLITE color m to the selected channel n where m is the discrete color number e lt Chan gt n Thru q Vari Lite Color m Enter applies VARI LITE color m to the selected range of channels where m is the discrete color number 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 97 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL VARIXLITE Color System Charts VL Color System for VARI XLITE Luminaires Note Numbers in the VL6 VL6B column correspond to VARIXLITE color wheel filters available by special order Table 5 1 VARIXLITE Color System for VARIXLITE Luminaires Color Name VL Similar VL
279. result of two factors First when the intensity is stored at a lower level as a result of a fader then the updated cue is automatically loaded back into the submaster it will immediately be affected for the second time by the fader setting causing a further reduction in intensity output Second if more than one submaster is selected the Highest Takes Precedence HTP protocol must be considered If a cue active in the first submaster is updated to an intensity level below that of the second submaster then after the cue is automatically reloaded to the submaster it will be overridden by the higher value of the second submaster which now controls the intensity output as a result When a cue is re stored while active in a submaster unexpected behavior can occur if 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 207 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Sub 208 Submaster Direct Mode To assist in updating or re storing cues it is possible to have the command line display track the sequence of cues being executed in a submaster Indicates that Direct Cues will advance according to sequence mode is active being played back in the specified submaster when Submaster Direct Mode is active ready channel There are two methods of initiating this mode e At keypad press Cue along with Choose button at required submaster e Press Cue Sub n where n is the desired submaster number Once the mode has
280. riwinkle 463 GAM 960 Match Match Match GAM 970 Dusty Lavender 466 Almost Match Match No Color Lilac 468 Lux 52 Match Match Special Lavender 469 Lux 54 Almost Match Dark Rose 471 Almost Match Dark Fushia 474 Lux 358 Match Match Match Dark Follies Pink 476 Match Match Match Magenta 478 Lee 126 Match Match Almost Hot Pink 480 Match Match Mauve 483 Match Match 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM VARI LITE COLOR SYSTEM CHARTS 5 Table 5 2 VARIXLITE Color System for DMX Fixtures Continued 02 9668 0001A VL Similar Color Name No To CYB SSZ PAL Follies Pink 489 Match Match Flesh Pink 491 Almost Almost Almost Rose Purple 492 Lux 48 Match Match Match Carnation 494 Almost Almost Match No Color Pink 495 Almost Almost Match Cool Bastard Amber 496 Lux 52 Almost Almost Match Lux 33 Dusty Rose 497 Almost Almost Match Rouge 498 Almost Match 12 April 01 105 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 106 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 6 Basic Cues This chapter provides an overview of cue concepts and instructions for storing a basic cue and playing it back Once you are familiar with these basic operations the Advanced Cue Features chapter on page 191 will allow you to fully utilize all of the Virtuoso console s cue capabilities e Cue Concepts e Creating Cues e Playback 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 107
281. rnal timecode clock will takeover or not when an external signal is lost Enabled when box is checked 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 247 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Display Filters Loading Filters Console status windows can be configured to include data from specified channels only Once a display filter has been loaded only data from the specified channels would be shown in the status windows and only these luminaires would appear in the 3D Graphic window Load a display filter Step 1 Select only channels you wish to be displayed in status or 3D Graphic windows Step 2 At Special menu select Load Display Filter Step 3 To load a new display filter repeat steps 1 and 2 for different groups of channels Clear a filter Step 1 Clear all channel selections Step 2 At Special menu select Load Display Filter 248 12 April 01 Solect Parkai Daiektorus Afar beng t teg Reset Beraltbreip Erase luminaire Deta Igdate Configperatien EN Share Coneguraliaii Dear mered Configeraian ga Pariian 02 9668 0001A SYSTEM SETUPS MULTI CONSOLE FEATURES 14 Multi Console Features Setting Up a Backup Console Virtuoso will allow a second console to be connected to a single lighting system This feature can be used to ready a backup console for quick takeover of system operations in the event the main console goes down To configure the system for multiple console connection it is necessa
282. roduction The 3D area displayed in the 3D Graphic window is referred to as a venue The window provides numerous user definable settings such as camera angles ambient lighting and rendered detail level The window also contains built in control interface features which allow luminaire parameter modification within the 3D graphic environment The 3D graphic display is based on a point of origin which is defined in the default venue or a venue that has been imported When importing a venue the point of origin used to create that 3D model would be the same point of origin used to base your luminaire 3D location in the patch setup For each luminaire an X Y and Z coordinate is defined which locates the luminaire horizontally vertically and at a certain depth from the point of origin Defining a New Venue Dimensions can be defined for a three dimensional venue which is a representation of your venue or stage production as defined by 3D modeling parameters This will be the venue size used in the 3D graphic window To define a new venue size Fila Sii File Messager fare 4 Copy import 20 b ckaroupng Deer Bach gored linpart Venue Step 1 At File menu select New Venue Dimensions window will open Step 2 Enter height width and depth measurements Step 3 Click OK fas fy Y Pi Ki rz v peg iad m 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 255 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL I
283. rols set all required parameters Step 4 Filter attributes as required using touch screen display in Filter mode Step 5 Press Store Beam Select Button or Store Label Beam Select Button xxxxxx return Delete a Beam e Delete Beam n Enter or Delete Beam Select Button The display will now show this as an empty Beam select Note This action will delete beam data for all types included in beam select 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 77 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 78 Note Since Beam selects store data according to luminaire types if a Beam is recalled which has no data for that luminaire type then the channel will remain in its previous state When recalled Beams are not routed through the filters Recall a Beam using Beams select display Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels of types that have data stored in that beam state will be affected Step 2 Ensure Beams are selected on at least one select display Step 3 Press required Beam Select Button Recall a Beam using command line keypad Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels of types that have data stored in that Beam will be affected Step 2 Press Beam n Enter where n is the discrete Beam number From Select Displays Window When storing or modifying Beams from the Select Displays first select channels of types to be stored in the Beam select refer to Select
284. rovides the realistic shaded look ps da Ambient Light kend eg Dim Pirechiang Light kal 2 Dim Ma rada rar Putergolaiiori Verte sl O Sikes Shades Erem sl Adjusts rendering style Wireframe will increase response time and speed Mide Fecing Camera of 3D Graphic window Q Ska ig pan la Camara Bact isci G Bath Siki Sets detail level i Adjusts virtual smoke level in venue of the graphic The brighter the smoke level the more visible the luminaire beams Adjusts the number of sides rendered into the beam The higher the detail the more e Restores default settings circular the beam pools will appear Note Rendered graphics require more memory and may slow down response time depending on how many rendering options are currently active 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 263 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Live Preview Mode D Live Pre View 264 Overview The 3D Graphic display when used in combination with the console s Preview Mode is a powerful tool for previewing cues and manual control moves without actually executing them on stage As mentioned in Chapter 1 of this manual the console has two special modes Live and Preview The Live Mode is used for live editing While the Live button is selected any manual control actions or event recalls cues effects dynamic states etc will be executed in real time on stage The Preview Mode is us
285. rtuoso e At Virtuoso icon menu select Off Line When in off ratt Consola line mode system configuration window will not Geng display any connected system devices and offline will appear next to the console icon System Config Consoles 1 Ring Status Not Complete 1 e YirtuosoDX Offline Indicates console is in off line mode 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 15 3D Graphic Display This chapter provides instructions for using the Virtuoso 3D Display features es 3D Features e 3D Display Window es Live Preview Mode 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 254 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 3D GRAPHIC DISPLAY 3D FEATURES 15 3D Features Overview The Virtuoso three dimensional features provide graphic feedback for live preview and off line editing purposes Once patched with a 3D location the 3D Graphic window will allow you to view your current luminaire configuration in either a wireframe or a rendered three dimensional representation Luminaire status and cue positions appear in the 3D Graphic window as they would appear live and any events played back while the window is open are reproduced The 3D capability will allow you to define a venue size or import a model of your particular stage production so that show files can be programmed and edited according to the demands of your particular p
286. ry to setup one console as a primary and one as a secondary Note Full multi user programming capability is not yet implemented Therefore it is recommended that no more than one console be used to program a show at one time Primary and Secondary Setups In a multi console setup there are two possible console configurations The configuration for each console depends on the purpose and system limitations for that particular multiple console setup e Primary Console This console serves as the main system console It stores the show file and retains overall submaster control Notes Each system must have a primary console Only one primary console per system is allowed e Secondary Console This console is an additional console hosted by the primary console It receives show data from the primary and mirrors all submaster operations Notes As many secondary consoles as required are allowed Must be used in conjunction with a primary console Online Backup The online backup feature is active when a main console and a backup console are connected in a system The online backup allows the backup secondary console to track all show file changes made at the main console so that if the backup console is required to takeover the transition is seamless without a console reset or data download to the system 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 249 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 250 Tip Q gt Power Up When powered
287. s active or inactive A special command which is used to recall specific parameter data from specified channels active or inactive in a cue preset or beam state A component of an effect which is made up of a number of steps The steps specify what action the applied set groups of lights are to take in an effect Also see Set A component of an effect which is made up of a number of parts The parts specify which channels are to be included in an effect A file containing all programmed cue data Show files reside on the console s hard drive and can be backed up to a removable medium such as a Zip disk A mechanism which controls the douser or strobe action of luminaires capable of this function A stored configuration for a console panel Snapshots can be recalled either manually or through cues in order to reset any one or all of the front panel controls or displays to the stored configuration A dual purpose function which allows manual control values to be staged and then recalled in a specified time Sneak provides a graphic display of command line entries that would not normally be visible and also provides a means of creating manual control moves on the fly For this purpose values can be assigned to parameters and then recalled at a specified time luminaire time or by manually pressing Enter at the touch screen One of six soft encoders provided for mapping parameters other than pan tilt and intensity which a
288. s and 0 00 for all other times Click to select Sequence 1 Select Preset Enter Preset number Enter time values Steps shown here correspond to Seq selected above 3 Define effect as follows a At Data menu select Effects Effects window will open b Using cursor select Effect 1 c At Set column enter 1 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 309 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL d At Seq column enter 1 An effect using Set 1 and Sequence 1 is now O ei O autatand re tubmantere IS Lat Aen Te ode created Enter 1 as the Set Advanced Features Enter 1 as the Sequence 4 Load Submaster and playback effect as follows a Effect 1 Loaded At Effects window ensure Effect 1 is selected Selected effect is displayed in Encoder window At Panels menu select Submasters Click Load of selected submaster to load effect E1 00 will appear in submaster s window At Submasters window click Select button to select submaster for playback Click Go of selected submaster to playback Effect 1 DUDA 1 gt ol e a Les Click to select E re ho submaster for playback E Click to 310 y Ee la playback effect 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A APPENDIX Ba Active Ad Hoc Group Beam Beam Select Blackout Board Cue Broadcast Bump Channel Glossary An intensity value greater than zero 1 100 Wh
289. s can be obtained from the System Configuration window if necessary c Specify lamp source and preheat level as required Preheat values of 0 to 9 percent may be assigned for incandescent luminaires 32 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH 2 Note The following three steps are only required if you intend to use the console s 3D graphic features For more information regarding these coordinates refer to Defining X Y Z Locations on page 259 d Use default 3D X Y and Z coordinates or enter new ones Use Position pop up menu to specify luminaire orientation and location i e hanging floor mount stage left etc f Use pointer or Rotate arrows to rotate luminaire to required position e After the first luminaire s icon has been placed and its information defined in the Luminaire Patch window you can place multiple icons without having the luminaire patch window open each time To do this hold down option while dropping icons Tip C gt g When finished click Save E Luminaire Pateh cnet E Tira ruleta Lave Camirel W Cierre Contral Dsm Define 3D settings Select Profile Define patch data or use defaults VL5Arc etc Specify lamp control Position luminaire source and preheat level Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 3 for each VARI LITE luminaire in your system Step 5 When all luminaires are defined in your patch at Patch menu select Disable Editing
290. s reporting errors Address connections 8 L ADE em rr beat Fe a Ci to open Versions A a window for naming _ y e d 1s Number indicates how many is iia SS consoles have been used to Y 4 Devices missing from a previously stored open the file configuration will appear grayed out Dot indicates Y Primary console Bold indicates this console console you are operating on Unique Ger console name SS M i a LA en OG n z IK T oz ETI Sr L E NIF Unit elt a Dr L 4 Smart Repeater Unit Luminaire Icon Green indicates online The window displays and keeps track of the following information e Device Icon An icon which represents the specific device type is displayed in relation to its position in the system In stored configurations the icon may appear srayed out if the device is not online to indicate a problem Double click the device to bring up the Device Info window which shows messages for that device also see Error Log on page 280 Channel Thumbwheel Address Channel assignment or thumbwheel address depending on setting is displayed for each device This number will change from black to green as the device comes online If the device is reporting any errors the number will be displayed in red 22 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH POWER UP VARI KLITE SYSTEMS 2 e Console hardware ID number A unique ID number will be generated f
291. s should first be created and then linked to a cue using the Link command 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 175 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Deleting Snapshots A snapshot can be deleted using the keypad Delete function Delete snapshot s e Delete Snapshot n Enter or e Delete Snapshot Select Button Recalling Snapshots When a snapshot is recalled any cues that were in active playback will be recalled in their stored times Any cues that were in pending will be placed in the appropriate pending files Recall snapshot using select display Step 1 Ata manual control select display press Bank Function Snaps Step 2 Press Snapshot Select Button Recall snapshot using command line keypad e Press Snapshot n Enter where n is the discrete snapshot number Recall snapshot via link e lt Cue gt n Link Snap Shot x Enter links Snapshot x to Cue n e Board Cue n Link Snap Shot x Enter links Snapshot x to Board Cue n Recall a snapshot via a macro e While recording a macro recall a snapshot When the macro is played back the snapshot will be recalled Refer to Macros on page 178 176 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES SNAPSHOTS 10 Snapshot Data Snapshot data can be viewed in the Snapshot Data window Open Snapshot Data window Cue Daba Preset Deia Color Paleo Data Be am Palette Data e At Data menu
292. select Snapshots e Dots indicate which panels are stored in each snapshot lragle Mala did Monitor 3 Channel Select Playback Monitor 2 Monitor 4 Manual Control Effects Monitor 1 Windows Submasters Label mz sia 3 Se ii e Win Subs A za He Di a UU fou E 3 4 5 e 7 6 3 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 177 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Macros 178 Overview A macro is a series of console operations button presses or display selections that has been recorded and stored by number The sequence entered during a macro record operation will automatically be played back when the macro is recalled Playback can be initiated by manual selection of the associated macro number or automated via cue sheet link instructions Macros can speed up programming by providing a way to easily execute repetitive or complicated commands or be used to automate playback sequences The Macro record function allows logical actions or events to be recorded Playback will affect the visible console state but will not simulate button presses or command line entries Macros are always recorded with timing information which can be recalled during playback if desired The time spaces between events are recorded in real time and will play back identically as the macro replays the events The macro timing feature can be specified during the recording or added on later Since macros always record in real time
293. sign To Submaster 3 Assigns sequence Note When a range of cues is specified er pee the start cue will appear in Action 1 column and end cue will appear in submaster A Action 2 column Action 1 Action Action 3 ype Walue Type Walue Type Walue 4 Loo 100 100 oni 1 00 oso Step list for selected sequence Use pop up menu to Specifies a Use pop up menu to Clears selected ste H select an action type stop flag select a background state Delete a step Step 1 Select Step you wish to delete Step 2 Click Clear Step button 128 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS CREATING EFFECTS 7 Background State Each sequence can contain one background state The background state tells the luminaires where to go when not executing a step The background state is an optional entry If a background state is not provided and the behavior of the effect determines that it does not have an action at certain points during the effect the luminaires will return to their state prior to being pulled into the effect If a background state has been defined however parts will run through each active step as determined by the distribution patterns for the effect and assume their background state until a subsequent instruction is provided From Effects Select Displays Define a background state D Step 1 At Effects Control press Seq Selects will display Sequences Steps and Seq Presets Step 2 At Steps select dis
294. st useful when you know the exact range of cues to be modified Guidelines e Any rate modifications will affect the stored time values accordingly e Unexpected behavior can occur with updates involving intensity if the submaster and Grand Master faders are not at full Refer to Store Update and Selective Store with Submasters on page 207 Update is intended for active cues only To add sections of the live stage output to inactive cues use the Selective Store command refer to Selective Store on page 204 e Any channel transferred to an independent submaster or parked in patch will not be updated All other cue data remains as originally set Note Unlike Selective Store Update commands are not routed through the Channel Select panel and the filter settings Update a cue e Update lt Cue gt n Enter updates Cue n with only those channels that were receiving their instructions from that cue Update multiple cues e Update Enter updates all modified channels in their source cues Any channels that had no source cue would not be stored Update a preset e Update Preset Enter updates all modified channels in their source cues and preset s Any channels that had no source cue would not be stored Update a preset in a specific cue e Update Cue n Preset Enter updates Cue n and its preset s with only those channels that were receiving their instructions from that cue Undo r
295. submaster Pressing either button at the Effects panel will operate the effect by stopping stepping or running Stop Flag Stops or steps through an effect When in a stopped state pressing Stop Flag will advance through the steps of an effect one with each button press in time When an effect is active in a submaster and Stop Flag is selected the effect will not execute when the submaster Go button is pressed Run Starts an effect When an effect is active in a submaster and Run is selected the effect will execute when the submaster Go button is pressed 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 13 Submasters This chapter contains instructions for operating the playback submasters e Submaster Overview e Submaster Modes e Playback Intensity Level e Playback 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 226 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SUBMASTERS SUBMASTER OVERVIEW 13 Submaster Overview Fold Out G Panel Submasters The 30 available submasters are used for playback of events These standard submasters are used for typical execution of cues effect or crossfade types or effects One way to operate the submasters is by using the hard faders and displays at the console front panel Submasters can be mapped ten at a time by selecting one of three banks 1 10 11 20 or 21 30 as required The display associated with each panel submaster provid
296. t DFARS The Government agrees that i if the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense DoD the Software is classified as Commercial Computer Software and the Government is acquiring only limited rights in the Software and its documentation as that term is defined in Clause 252 227 7013 a 13 of the DFARS and ii if the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the United States Government other than DoD the Government s rights in the Software and its documentation will be as defined in Clause 52 227 19 c 2 of the FAR 10 Indemnity You agree to indemnify and hold harmless Vari Lite and its parents subsidiaries affiliates officers directors shareholders employees and agents from and against any costs losses liabilities and expenses including reasonable attorney s fees that Vari Lite may suffer incur or be subjected to by reason of any claim by a third party due to or arising out of your conduct your use of the Software any alleged breach of this License or the representations and warranties herein the alleged violation of the rights of any third party or any alleged infringement of the intellectual property rights of any third party including but not limited to your use of any content trademarks service marks trade names or other intellectual property used in connection with the Software Vari Lite reserves the right to control the exclusive defense of any matter otherwise subject to your indemnifi
297. t Data window 177 deleting 176 Filter window 174 overview 92 173 recalling 176 storing 174 177 Sneak function key 168 overview 153 templates 156 Speed attributes 143 formats 143 Start efffect 121 Status Columns window 75 85 Status indicator description 13 14 Status mimic 44 Step background 129 creating 127 128 definition 117 118 126 deleting 128 Stop flag effect 223 224 Store function key 166 Submaster banks 227 228 board cue Go 187 bump 236 channel filter 233 12 April 01 327 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL choose 229 clear 230 faders 199 207 filters 149 freeze 231 function filter 232 independent 234 manual assign 234 modifying cues in 206 panel 227 playback of cues 114 241 playback of effects 135 223 rate 231 timing disable 233 window 228 System patching 25 T Target last stored 201 Template creating 156 recalling 156 157 timing window 156 touch screen 157 Tilt 50 51 Timing delay 144 145 disable 233 effect 218 219 220 format 142 function key 168 guidelines 142 manual timing 162 operation 143 overview 141 sequence 221 222 templates 156 Timing disable submaster 233 Timing Display window 328 templates 156 Touch screen dynamic state mode 150 features 139 filter mode 146 148 general operation 139 selecting modes 139 setting parameters 139 sneak mode 153 154 155 templates 140 timing mode 141 U Undo 113 206 function key 169 U
298. t data 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 155 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Templates 156 Creating Templates There are 20 programmable templates associated with each mode of the Timing Filter window These can be used to recall frequently used filter timing sneak and dynamic state settings When the window is in Timing Mode these are time templates When the window is in Filter mode these are filter templates etc All 20 templates are accessible from the Timing window however only the first six are accessible from the touch screen From Timing Window Store a new template Step Step Step Step Step Step l 2 3 Setup window as desired Click STORE Button will be highlighted Click button 1 20 where you want to store template Settings will be stored and STORE button will no longer be highlighted Click LABEL 5 Click button of template to label 6 At keyboard enter label and press return Recall a template e Click button 1 20 of required template Settings will be applied to window 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TIMING FILTER DISPLAYS TEMPLATES 3 From Touch Screen The first six programmable templates can be accessed using the six buttons to the right of the Touch Screen Once stored the template can be accessed at any time by pressing the required button Template Buttons
299. t keypad mode Displays event Used when entering number and label channel or cue ranges Scrolls up or down through Displays command pay cue sheet or effects line as entered Indicates filtered data Virtuoso DX FTE Cue l store cue 1 C B G BlWash Store Cue 1 Label Store Update e Chan ech 4 K Ss 2 Link Loop on D d d J a N A A XA y L C Time y Sel Track Board Snap Yy Store Fu cue Macro Shot X 7 S 8 EN Wait Trail Rate Z j i A J aN EN IN IN Recall Undo Preset Color Beam 4 CD 6 Time Block Sub JO H l l k JEE E Neate 4 II Wl y WO ae WoO LAS ETN eg II A Vari lite Vol Label Sneak Set Seq VI j D Speed Color S ee 2 E Ser ld ra 4 h J R y a gt Ni J Copy N j Delete Group Ste Clear At Full En
300. t trail or none Auto Follow time Number of loop cycles Cue link Snapshot link PU A Of am Itten Mer linkto AF mg Punch In Insert Go Subruatar 1 Select Zu vregter 7 Load nbreaster I Load Gabreaster 2 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES BOARD CUES 10 Delete a step Step 1 Using trackpad select step s to be deleted Step 2 Click on trash can icon Step s will be removed Replace a step Step 1 Using trackpad select step to be replaced Step 2 Click replace icon Board Cue button will begin flashing Step 3 At desk perform replacement action The first action taken will replace the selected step and editing will end Replace all steps from Step X on through remainder of Board Cue Step 1 Using trackpad select last good step Steps after this selection will be replaced Step 2 Click punch in icon Board Cue button will begin flashing Step 3 At desk perform new series of actions Note Board Cue can be updated or re stored as a new number Step 4 To store back into original number Press Update Board Cue Enter To store into new number Press Store Board Cue n Enter or Store Board Cue n Label Enter xxxxxx return Insert new step s Step 1 Using trackpad select step prior to where you wish to insert new step Step 2 Click insert icon Board Cue button will begin flashing at a
301. te Shift button toggles between two configurations fe 1 1 1 v Ol 9 J J S Palette Shift Bank Function 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 We A a SS gf 7 Ca N vs La y CS wN Ces N A KY INP PO Jun Ju Ju Jun Jun DN DN ZX a a y T EN Ki EN PS Z 3 Leg AGA Y AGA E JI AN Zi Zu FIA EY 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Bank Buttons 11 20 With Bank Function pressed these buttons access different banks 333 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Command Line Keypad Quick Reference Atl Enters an intensity value Example lt Chan gt 5 At 7 5 Enter Beam Stores or recalls a beam state Example lt Chan gt 5 Beam 2 0 Enter Block Feature not yet implemented Board Cue Stores or recalls a board cue Example Board Cue 5 Enter Chan Selects a channel or a range of channels Example Chan 5 Enter Clear Clears command line entries Holding down will clear an entire unterminated command line Color Stores or recalls a color Example lt Chan gt 5 Color 3 0 Enter Copy Move Allows manipulation of preset cue sets and sequences data Example Copy Move Cue 1 At 2 Enter Cuel Stores or recalls a cue Example Store Cue 5 Enter Delay Adds a countdown time to a luminaire parameter used with touch screen Example Delay 1 Enter Delete Deletes a soft select cue effect group etc Example
302. ted Then while holding down first button press button of last number in range First and last buttons will light as will all those in between Select channels on multiple pages Step 1 Press 000 or 1000 as required Step 2 Press 0 through 900 as required Button will light Step 3 Press button of first channel number to be selected Then while holding down first button press button of last number in range First and last buttons will light as will all those in between Step 4 Press next required page 0 through 900 First page number button will flash to show that channels are selected on that page Step 5 Press buttons for channels to be selected Step 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as required Deselect a single channel or multiple single channels e Press any selected channel button s to deselect Deselect a range of channels e Press button of first selected channel button to be deselected Then while holding down first button press button of last number in range The range will be deselected Shortcut gt To select a single channel and deselect all others double click on any channel button 46 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Shortcut gt MANUAL CONTROL CHANNEL SELECT 3 Console Channel Select Buttons Six special buttons are available on the console for simplifying channel selection O AS Active Invert i a RI INV N Mark All O EEN aa SN Zero Clear KN
303. ted channels using the Color select display or command line keypad A VARI LITE color palette is available by default however colors can be reprogrammed as required A series of keypad entries for the purpose of manual control of luminaires or for pro gramming cues effects presets etc See Channel Feature which allows manipulation of preset cue sets and sequences data A cue type as opposed to an effect cue type that contains end state target data and timing transition data Crossfades will replace the data provided by the previous cue in the same fader or will provide last instructions to all parameter data when played back in another fader with the exception of intensity data which is handled in a HTP manner unless LTP is selected as the intensity default A programmed event that can be played back on any submaster A cue can be a crossfade or effect 10 000 cues can be recorded numbered from 01 to 9999 99 Data which is programmed in association with a given cue number Cue attributes include labels out time for luminaires assuming an inactive state in the associated cue links to other cues macros board cues or snapshots with or without wait trail times and alternate fader assignments Rate link and loop instructions may also be associ ated with cues Provides a sequential listing of cues and board cues along with all assigned attributes Also indicates cue status active or inactive and is reflective of li
304. tep 3 At desk perform replacement action The first action taken will replace the selected step and editing will end Replace all steps from Step X on through remainder of macro Step 1 Using trackpad select last good step Steps after this selection will be replaced Step 2 Click punch in icon Console Macro Rec button will begin flashing Step 3 At desk perform new series of actions Note Macro can be updated or re stored as a new number Step 4 To store back into original number Press Update Macro Enter To store into new number Press Store Macro n Enter or Store Macro Rec n Label Enter xxxxxx return Insert new step s Step 1 Using trackpad select step prior to where you wish to insert new step Step 2 Click insert icon Console Macro button will begin flashing Step 3 At desk perform new action s Step 4 To store back into original number Press Update Macro Enter To store into new number Press Store Macro n Enter or Store Macro n Label Enter xxxxxx return 182 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES MACROS 10 Recalling Macros Macros can be recalled at any select display at the Macro window or by playing back the linked cue Recall macro using select display Step 1 Ata manual control select display press Bank Function Macro Step 2 Press Macro Select Button Recall macro using co
305. ter move AA SAI LAL A 4 Initiates a Enters numeric i Labels groups Sneak move values Enters cues effects and selects Deletes a programmed action or parameter set Allows manipulation of cue Enters command line Specifies destination of la store recall undo and intensity values delete commands ANE Enters special cue and Command line backspace key submaster attributes Holding down will delete an entire unterminated command line preset set and sequence data 12 April 01 334 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Submasters Quick Reference Common operations and guidelines for using submasters Play a cue or effect Step 1 At keypad press Cue n Enter or scroll through cue list to recall a cue or press Effect n Enter or select effect at an Effect select display Step 2 At desired submaster press Select to select submaster for playback function Step 3 Press Load to place cue effect in submaster s pending file Step 4 Ensure Grand Master and submaster faders are set at full Step 5 Press Go to play Play next cue or effect e Press Go to play back pending event Play previous cue or effect e Press Back to play previous event Stop Step Step 1 Press Stop Step to stop a running autofollow Step 2 Press Stop Step repeatedly to step through cues without autofollows Step 3 Press Run to resume playback with
306. ter stage Click to refocus beams towards target Point of Interest Mode Selector Brings up target for refocusing luminaires Target for refocus WE he um A eee JE ER i a e a 306 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 5 Store focus information as Preset 3 as follows Press F1 Store window will open b Using cursor select Preset Or press P at key board c Enter 3 for the preset number d Click OK e At Select Displays window at Preset section click inside Preset 3 box to send luminaires to Preset 3 6 Add timing information as follows At Timing Display window click Timing tab to display Timing screen a b Click in Pan and Tilt boxes to select for timing information o Press F11 Timing window will open Enter 5 gt e Click OK to send value to Timing screen T 5 00 will appear in Pan and Tilt boxes f At Timing screen click Enter button to send timing information to cue store operations TT Gau reali la la A o PO CT wl Coda da la g iu e 4 iu ta iora Timing Information A ss vi a ee tee 7 Store Cue 3 as follows a Press Fl b Enter 3 as cue number and click OK to store Cue 3 is now stored with timing information and a reference to Preset 3 s focus information 8 Playback all three cues Refer to instructions on page 304 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 307 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Create and playback an effect Ref
307. ther their height is the same or different To change height Step 1 At Operation menu select Plan View Plan View window will open and 2D Display menu will become available on menu bar Step 2 At Patch menu select Enable Editing Step 3 Select required luminaire icons using pointer Step 4 At 2D Display menu select Change Height Set Height window will open Dra hie drid Sie Step 5 Do one of the following To change height s to an absolute setting select Z Enter value which will become new height of all selected luminaires Click OK To change height s on a relative basis select AZ Enter value which will be added or subtracted from current height location Click OK Relative height Absolute height adjustment adjustment Set Height 807 QAZ Enter value 260 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A 3D GRAPHIC DISPLAY 3D DisPLAY WINDOW 15 Using 3D Graphic Window The 3D Graphic window displays your current luminaire configuration in either a wireframe or a rendered three dimensional representation Note If you open the 3D Graphic window without having defined a new venue or imported a venue you will be asked to define the venue size Refer to Defining a New Venue on page 255 e Luminaires are focused along a focus line which reflects the actual focus and color of the luminaire s beam Luminaire beams can be refocused as required by indicating targets via the crosshairs e Changing the focus
308. thumbwheel address es device lamp power etc and maps them to a single selectable number Channels are assigned via the patch setup Also referred to as a Control Channel 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 311 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Channel Filter Color Color Select Command Line Control Channel Copy Move Crossfade Cue Cue Attribute Cue Sheet Delay Time Douse Down Fade Time 312 A submaster mode which allows only the channels selected at the point the channel filter button is deployed to be enabled on that submaster Taking the submaster out of channel filter mode enables all channels again The channels to be filtered must be selected each time the channel filter is engaged for a submaster The subjective interpretation by the human eye and nervous system of electro magnetic radiation in the 380 to 760 nm band visible light Also a function of the luminaire specified by color and saturation data or by filter position data Hue is the subjective appreciation of the dominant wavelength of a light source the attribute of color perception by which different parts of the spectrum are distinguished red orange yellow green blue violet purple Saturation is the subjective appreciation of purity a relation of the intensity of the dominant wavelength to all other wavelengths defined by terms such as deep pale light dark Programmed colors which can be applied to selec
309. tions for storing groups of luminaires for the purpose of simplifying channel selection These groups are generally based on luminaire types truss positions or other distinctions unique to your particular show Ad Hoc groups however are a way of selecting channels on the fly which are not already pre stored as a group The Ad Hoc feature accomplishes this task by allowing you to select channels based on information such as all channels in a specific preset or all channels in a specific color Creating Ad Hoc Groups Ad Hoc groups can be created using the command line keypad select displays specialty buttons or the submasters From Keypad e Group Preset n Enter selects all active channels in Preset n where n is the discrete preset number e Group Color n Enter selects all active channels in Color n where n is the discrete color number e Group Cue n Enter selects all active channels in Cue n This does not affect the current position of those channels e Group At n selects all active channels with intensity value of n From Select Displays e Group Preset Select Button selects all active channels in Preset n where n is the discrete preset number e Group Beam Select Button selects all active channels in Beam Select n where n is the discrete beam number From Submasters e Group Choose selects all channels in the submaster s active cue
310. tive Recall ii a A E Ea Cab beRe 205 Undo a Delete Commande 206 Modifying Cues in a Submaster oo cece ceeseceecsseeseeeescecseeseceseeceeeeeseeeaecaecnseeseeeses 206 Store Update and Selective Store with Submasters ooooonocccnnncnnnocinonoccnnnnccnnnoss 207 Unexpected Behavior si cccciscteigte ina lidia ed Nee eke toed dan rai 207 Submaster Direct Mode Auge at e rada ee 208 Cue Windows Cue SHEECE xh scare dei OAE eo ieee ad a EE 209 Forward Backward Buttons 209 EDEGEM 210 Re umberins Cuesta arab 211 Submasters Track Modern cc sssicccisiscccestsvacsesecsivssssavvesevedavasascbabavavacarasanasasassegeabes 211 Submasters Autoload ooooccccnnnonuonononccnononnannononoonnnn nono nononnnnn nan nconononnnnnn cnc nonannnnos 211 ell EE ee E 211 CUES EE 212 Cue Edit AA AA A de 213 Chapter 12 Advanced Effects Features Advanced Attributes Changing Direction Mode or Start Settings ooooonocnnnncccnnnccnoncnonnnanonancnnn cc conc ccnnnan nn 217 Effect Timing E EE 218 Effect Lev l Timing ia di 219 Assigning Effects Level mung 220 From Select DisplayS cuca Sele Gees aden Bed eae 220 Prom Effects WOSST cwekbiadeessinisets cant E EEEE EEES 220 Cycle Counters diia diia 221 Sequence Level Ting ici aii Vee ceed EN 221 Assigning Sequence Level Tmmg conc cnn ncnn nor ncnnc cnn 222 From Select Displays io a ae 222 Fr n Effects MWrmdlomwz eu egE Ed Eed dee eanet ee niLa Sor EES EEES 222 Advanced Playback DOP Etgen Ee E tee OS 223
311. tive luminaire out has no recorded data for any parameter A series of command strings button presses or display selections that can be recorded for automated playback either through manual selection of the associated macro number or from automated activation through the Cue Sheet A submaster mode which allows a submaster to control the parameters of manually assigned channels as well as stored events Manual Control Override allows a manual intensity level to be established for an inactive channel That level will remain in effect until a channel receives a command from an active marked or out channel A channel on manual control override may be placed on a submaster for intensity control It will remain under the control of that submaster until it receives a new instruction or until a new event is played back on that submaster If the submaster is independent the channel will remain under the control of that submaster until the submaster is released from independent or until a forced update is completed A console mode which allows attributes recalled by a select to follow the timing values that are currently active in the luminaires Returns an affected channel parameter to its previous state after a select is deployed or an action is taken on the keypad or with an encoder Channel selection opens a buffer which snapshots the current setting making it possible to restore by subsequent presses of the Man Undo button all actions ta
312. tore function Hold option and click in cell to store a select enables the Label function Hold and click in cell to label a select 170 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 10 Snapshots Macros and Board Cues This chapter provides instructions for storing your own console setups and frequently used programming actions and for orchestrating submaster playback functions with board cues e Snapshots e Macros Board Cues 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 171 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 172 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES SNAPSHOTS 10 Snapshots Overview A snapshot is a captured state on the console which can be recalled at any time in the future States such as Channel Select panel selections touch screen status submaster setups and windows layouts can be captured as a snapshot Snapshots can be recalled via manual selection of the associated snapshot number or by automated activation through the cue sheet via link instructions Snapshots may also be included in macros The Snapshot Filter window allows you to select those areas of the console you wish to include in a snapshot store operation Once this window is setup it only needs to be changed if you are going to store a snapshot which requires a different setup The Snapshot window displays a Virtuoso console however the sections of the console and associated snapsh
313. ts all marked channels MAR Z e Z selects all channels in a zero state Active luminaires with intensity greater than zero 1 100 Marked luminaires with an intensity state of marked Zero luminaires with an intensity state of zero hard zero 0 level For a more in depth explanation refer to Intensity States on page 110 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 43 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL 44 Status Mimic These four buttons located at the top right portion of the Channel Select window are referred to as status mimic buttons Here channel select buttons illuminate in purple as an indicator rather than as a selection tool On Lin Indicates all online luminaires Act Indicates all luminaires that are active Mar Indicates all luminaires that are marked Z Indicates all luminaires that are in a zero state Active luminaires with intensity greater than zero 1 100 Marked luminaires with an intensity state of marked Zero luminaires with an intensity state of zero hard zero 0 level For a more in depth explanation refer to Intensity States on page 110 From Keypad Channel selection guidelines e Any combinations of and Thru are allowed e Thru lists channel ranges must be entered in ascending order only s Enter terminates the selection process and sets the keypad so that the next entr
314. uding timing can be stored in a Preset as determined by the filter settings The touch screen display is used to control the filters refer to Filter Mode on page 146 Since focus is a large part of the Preset feature no standard pre programmed Presets are available These will need to be stored in relation to the specific requirements of your show Features The most important feature of Presets is that they are referenced by cues This feature provides a way of saving time during the initial programming of a show and for updating focuses or other parameters throughout all of your cues if something on stage changes For example a Preset may be stored as a focus reference cue in which only pan and tilt parameters are specified These could be labeled Stage Center Stage Right Stage Left etc When you use a Preset to build a cue the Preset information is linked directly to that cue If a refocus is required the appropriate Preset could be changed and all the cues built using it would automatically reflect the change Indicates that Presets have been selected Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 10 20 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SELECT DISPLAYS PRESETS A Preset Data Window Preset data can be viewed in the Preset Data window The top portion of the window shows the Preset list along with all associated labels channels and filters which have been stored into the Presets In additio
315. ue The submaster can play back previously played a Plays last cue cues in decrementing order Plays pending cue e Press Back to play previous cue Shortcut C gt If submaster is empty at keypad press cue number then at submaster press Go Must be valid cue number Scales intensity 114 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 7 02 9668 0001A Basic Effects This chapter provides an overview of effects concepts and instructions for storing an effect and playing it back Once you are familiar with these basic operations the Advanced Effects Features chapter on page 215 will allow you to utilize all of the Virtuoso console s effects capabilities e Effects Concepts e Creating Effects e Playback 12 April 01 115 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 116 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Basic EFFECTS EFFECTS CONCEPTS 7 Effects Concepts What is an Effect An effect is a looping wave or ripple type operation which can be applied to multiple channels Once created an effect can be stored as a cue or played back directly on any submaster Effects are comprised of two components The first component is a Set A set is comprised of parts which define which channels luminaires are to be included in the effect playback and in which order they will be addressed Discrete channel numbers or channel ranges may be used
316. ue number Board Cue Go button will light From Encoders Window Board cue or macro recording can also be initiated from the Encoders window Use Rec button to begin a board cue record operation as follows Click to Rec begin Macro recording Hold 77777 1 button and click Rec to begin Board Cue recording Deleting Board Cues Delete a board cue or a range of board cues e Delete Board Cue n Enter deletes the entire board cue e Delete Board Cue n Thru q Enter deletes a range of board cues 186 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES BOARD CUES 10 Recalling Board Cues Board cues can be recalled and played back using the command line keypad and Board Control Go When a board cue is recalled the Go button at the submasters panel will start flashing Pressing Go will play back the board cue and any linked events Pressing Stop Back will pause the board cue autofollow time not execution until Go is pressed again wherein it will resume autofollow from the point at which it was stopped Play back a board cue Step 1 At keypad press Board Cue n where n is the discrete board cue number Board cue Go button will light Recalled Board Cue D board 1 START cue set board cue 1 Board Cue 1 Step 2 At submasters panel press Go to initiate playback Go button will begin flashing Pending Board Cue Act
317. ues presets can be stored with intensity values 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 199 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Shortcut gt 200 Command Line Shortcuts The command line feature has several built in shortcut and convenience capabilities which can be used to speed up and simplify operations Some shortcuts have been indicated so far throughout the manual with the graphic shown to the left of this text These shortcuts along with additional ones are collected here Using with Store The button can be used to increment the store target by a predetermined increment value default 1 Using with a 1 increment value e Pressing Store 1 Enter will store Cue 1 Pressing Store Enter will store Cue 2 Pressing Store Enter will store Cue 3 etc Using with a 0 1 increment value e Pressing Store 1 Enter will store Cue 1 Pressing Store 1 Enter will store Cue 1 1 Pressing Store Enter will store Cue 2 2 etc Increment Value Indicator store next cue Store Note The increment value is also displayed in the Encoders window Refer to Encoders Window on page 56 Store Store This command line entry can be substituted for the standard cue store entry e Press n Store Store to store Cue n Submaster Load A cue specified at the keypad can be immediately loaded and played back in an e
318. unction allows you to remove all data from a select Once deleted the select will be empty Step 1 At popup menu select function you wish to access Group Color Beam etc Step 2 At Bank popup menu select required bank Step 3 Click required Page button Step 4 Click DELETE WM Step 5 Click Select Button of select you wish to delete Select will now be empty Note For deleting presets all channels stored in the preset must be selected Select The Select feature allows you to apply data to channels Note Pressing any select buttons on the console will automatically place the top select display in Select Mode Step 1 Select channels to receive command refer to Selecting Channels on page 41 Step 2 At popup menu select function you wish to access Group Color Beam etc Step 3 At Bank popup menu select required bank Step 4 Click required Page button Step 5 Click Select Button of select whose parameters you wish to apply 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 73 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Beams Overview The Beam select provides a means for storing and recalling a palette of up to 100 beam states These can be used for building cues As a default Beams may contain standard static and rotating gobo wheel positions however it is possible to store your own Beams over the defaults and relabel as required These programmable Beams can include parameters such as beam zoom
319. up a console will assume its previous configuration The configuration information is stored along with the show file If a system detects multiple primary consoles a dialog will pop up requiring you to choose a single primary console When the primary console is configured in this case the conflicting console s will automatically respond to the new configuration setup It is good practice to power up the primary console first in a multi console setup Configuring Multiple Consoles By default in a single console setup the console will automatically be configured as the primary console Ina Se ees esas Console multi console setup secondary consoles can be configured Contig as Secondary seras Primary Tres at the File menu paeit Weraagn Configure a secondary console Zoe Step 1 At console to be configured at Virtuoso icon menu select Config as Secondary Console fant Step 2 At confirmation window click OK to proceed or Cancel to abort dro you sere yau want to be a secondary comade Takeover as primary console Step 1 At console to become primary at File menu select Takeover as Primary Console Step 2 At confirmation window click OK to proceed Or Cancel to abort H Are pou sure you wani ihis console lo Naming consoles take over as the Primary Console Step 1 At System Configuration window double P gt 8 Cancel ox click icon of console to be named or at Virtu
320. uring playback when you recall a board cue all of the keystrokes are sent immedi ately to the console You can attached wait times to insert controlled delays in the playback sequence You can also loop board cues to play back the event over and over either for a specified number of times or until it is manually stopped Several methods can be used to control board cue playback including MIDI timecode MIDI notes and manual control 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A SNAPSHOTS MACROS AND BOARD CUES BOARD CUES 10 Recording Board Cues Using Record Button e The quickest method for recording board cues utilizes the Bd Cue Rec button and So eue command line keypad Store button When Bd Cue Rec is pressed the button will flash indicating that the recording function is enabled Pressing a second time will disable the record function in the event you need to abort the action Record a board cue using record button Step 1 Press Bd Cue Rec Button will flash Step 2 Enter sequence of playback actions as required Step 3 Press Store Board Cue n Enter or Store Board Cue n Label Enter xxxxxx return where n is a discrete board cue number Board Cue Go button will light Step 4 Bd Cue Rec button will stop flashing From Keypad The board cue record function can be initiated from the command line keypad Board cue timing can also be specified at the keypad When Enter is pressed the Bd Cue Rec
321. use defaults DMX Patch Window 306 Setliaga Lateltabeam 11 c Location DG Cheanala 11 F E z E 8 2 EN Orientation Channel nu Tiwari bra tots i conflict with an existing address Hora gt Heit D ju Starting DMX Address Typically the DMX fixture s thumbwheel setting Specify lamp control source preheat level if required 30 Lomo Corral Si External Cantr Sep Pee Tilt Sr r Fan Defines special focus instructions Position luminaire if available 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A POWER UP AND PATCH PATCH 2 Note The next three steps are only required if you intend to use the console s 3D graphic features For more information regarding these coordinates refer to Defining X Y Z Locations on page 259 f Use default 3D X Y and Z coordinates or enter new ones g Use Position pop up menu to specify luminaire orientation and location i e hanging floor mount stage left etc h Use pointer or Rotate arrows to rotate luminaire to required position i When finished click Save Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 3 for each DMX luminaire in your system Step 5 When all luminaires are defined in your patch at Patch menu select Disable Editing This prompts a dialog allowing you to save editing Click Add Scroller to Channel Assignment j i highlight Scroller window Channel which will control fixture Define 3D settings or use defaults Select Profile Bus Choice if app
322. ut not in the 3D patch The 3D X and Y coordinates would still be the default values given that the icon has not previously been moved while in 3D mode The link is considered broken at this point e Ifan icon is moved in the Plan View while in 3D mode the X and Y coordinates would be updated in its 2D and 3D patch information They are still considered linked at this point provided that they have not already been moved in the 2D mode General Rule Modifying icon positions in the 2D mode will not be reflected in the 3D patch Modifying icon positions in the 3D mode will be reflected in the 2D patch Note The Match 3D feature available in the Drawing Size window allows importing of the size and window positioning coordinates from the 3D graphic into the Plan View This requires that a 3D graphic has been previously imported Refer to Match 3D on page 258 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 37 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL This page intentionally blank 38 30 Mar 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 3 Manual Control This chapter provides instructions for controlling luminaires in order to build cues e Channel Select e Lamp Control e Encoder Control e Keypad Control es Luminaire Status Note The Select Displays feature is also used for manual control of luminaires however due to the versatility of this feature it is covered in a separate chapter 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 39 VARI LITE V
323. ve mode operations in that it will display the last activated cue A countdown time applied to any luminaire parameter time which begins from the moment the associated cue is executed To de energize a luminaire lamp Douse is unrelated to intensity states Timing value associated with channel intensity settings Down Fade time affects the intensity transition in the event the transition is in a downward direction The Down Fade time has an associated delay time 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Dynamic Disable Dynamic State Edge Effect Effects Index Effects Wheel Effect Timing Emergency Cue Frame Filter Filter Mode Flip Focus Freeze Frost 02 9668 0001A GLOSSARY R A submaster mode which prohibits the replay of dynamic states on that submaster Pre packaged actions states of motion which can be applied to channels or groups of channels and then stored as a cue or preset When stored into a preset the state infor mation as well as the established orientation size and rate are stored When stored into a cue the attributes affected by the dynamic state will follow the timing informa tion for those parameters before assuming the dynamic state with its rate information In a wash luminaire edge defines the spot or flood range of the diffusion mecha nism s In a spot luminaire edge defines the hardness or softness of the beam edge A programmed chase sequence that can be played back on any sub
324. w 00 eeceseesseceseeseeeseeesceceaeceeceseeceseeeneseaeeaaecnaeens 91 Prom Keypad TT 91 Macros Snapshots and Effects OVEL VIE Wii a A Aa 92 Chapter 5 VARI LITE Color System Color Control COVELVICW ua il ion ita leida 95 VAREELITE Colors cu ra idad 95 Applying VARI LITE Colors From VL Color System Window eccescescesessnecsseesseeeseesaeceaeceeeeseceeseaeeeaeesaecaeees 96 Prom Keypad i 2 scien hth daa 97 VARIXLITE Color System Charts VL Color System for VARI LITE Luminaires 0 e ee ceeseeceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeaeeaeeeeens 98 VL Color System for DMX Controllable Fixtures ooooonnocnnocinocanonononcnnnconacnnananannos 102 Chapter 6 Basic Cues Cue Concepts What Isa Cuesta nein ied eet ene ea 109 Creating Cues Intensity Static lianas doko Heli eas ee et 110 The Four Intensity States iesse irenstean ia rei a aieia 110 Setting Intensity States dech Eege e eiea oai EE 111 Fader Level ici a cist ive e Saw ae 111 SITIO EE 112 Modtty img cid ii E R E ERRA 112 Deli A as 113 UndO cet AN nn ee a et a da 113 Playback BasicPlayDadck ininiai cda ld dt da 114 xvi 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 7 Basic Effects Effects Concepts What 1s an Election 117 Effects Control Panel and Windows cccccccesseceseceseeceeeeeeeneeeseeeeaeceeaeceeneeeeeeeees 118 Direction Mode NOISE de e NEE 119 RN 119 Mod a a 120 EN EE 121 Default SENOS a 121 Creating Effects Creating Sl talla 1
325. w for loop or sequential cue Loops should be defined on the last cue of a sequence Store a cue with link and loop instructions e Store lt Cue gt n Link m Loop x Enter links Cue n and Cue m with a loop of x times Add a loop to an existing linked cue e lt Cue gt n Loop x Enter Cue n and its linked cue will loop x times Remove a loop instruction from a linked cue e lt Cue gt n Loop Enter To add a Loop instruction to the currently selected cue press Loop n Enter where n is the number of desired loops 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 195 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Wait Trail 196 Wait Trail Time Wait or Trail time instructions may be stored into a cue to control the start of subsequent or linked events refer to Link on page 194 Wait is a timing attribute which causes the next event to be automatically executed after the wait time has elapsed The wait time begins counting from the moment the cue is executed Trail is a timing attribute which causes the next event to be automatically executed after the trail time has elapsed The trail time begins counting from the moment the cue has completed Guidelines e A cue can have either a Wait or a Trail instruction but not both e If no linked event is specified via a Link instruction then the subsequent cue in the cue list will execute after the wait trail time has elapsed e Ifa linked eve
326. will cause slower playback of events 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Recall Reset Run Select Selected Saturation Secondary Console Select Display Selective Store Selective Recall Sequence Set Show File Shutter Snapshot Sneak Soft Encoder Soft Reset 02 9668 0001A GLOSSARY E Allows specified parameter data for selected channels to be recalled live from stored preset or cue as modified by any filter settings See Hard Reset or Soft Reset To resume the operation of a stopped effect or resume the wait trail countdown of a stopped cue To obtain manual control of a luminaire from the console Also a programmed set of attributes for Beam Color Preset or stored groups macros and templates A channel or group of channels which will respond to manual control The subjective appreciation of purity a relation of the intensity of the dominant wave length to all other wavelengths defined by terms such as deep pale light dark This console is an additional console hosted by the primary console It receives show data from the primary and mirrors all submaster operations One of three panel displays or Select Displays window components and associated buttons which provide mapping of presets colors beams macros groups and templates for store and recall applications A special command which is used to modify or add parameter data to a cue preset or beam state for specified channel
327. will provide 20 select buttons per page Access a different page within a select display e Press desired page button 1 through 5 at top of select display Access a different select in any display window e At select display press and hold Bank Function while pressing Beams Colors Presets Groups Macros Snaps or Effects as required Store a new select Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select required channels Using manual controls set all required parameters Filter attributes as required using touch screen display Press Store Select Button where Select Button is color beam preset group macro snapshot or effect as required Label a select e Press Label Select Button xxxxxx return Recall a stored select Step 1 Select required channels only selected channels that have data stored in that select will be affected Step 2 Press required Select Button where Select Button is color beam preset group macro snapshot or effect as required 02 9668 0001A Window Select Popup Menu Selects Presets Beams Colors Groups Macros Snapshots or Effects Bank Popup Menu Vielect Displays Page Buttons STORE riers LABEL ES DELETE K LABEL SS DELETE Select Button Select Mode Button Places window in select mode Operation Buttons Operation will be applied to currently active select 12 April 01
328. www vari lite com a Series 200 DMX Control Reference Guide 02 3004 0202 mw Virtuoso Profile Reference Guide 02 3004 0405 For more information on DMX512 systems refer to the following document available from United States Institute for Theatre Technology Inc USITT a Digital Data Transmission Standard for Dimmers amp Controllers plus AMX 192 Analog Multiplex Data Transmission Standard for Dimmers amp Controllers A copy of Recommended Practice for DMX512 is included USITT Inc Suite 5A 10 West 19th St New York NY 10011 4206 USA Tel 212 924 9088 Fax 212 924 9343 www usitt org 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 1 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Obtaining Additional DMX Profiles DMX fixtures are controlled by the Virtuoso DX console using a profile The profile includes the number of DMX channels required to operate the fixture and parameter mapping for console control A wide range of profiles are included with the console software however in the event you require additional profiles these can be found on the Vari Lite website at www vari lite com VIPA Follow the instructions at this site for downloading available profiles To request a profile not provided on the website please call 1 877 VARI LITE 1 877 827 4548 or email marketing vari lite com Please be prepared to provide the necessary information to generate the profile as required Note Profiles are covered in Updating Prof
329. xxx return 12 April 01 1 1 H 1 O G 919 E Effects OMA 7 9 pi VU Bank Function 02 9668 0001A BASIC EFFECTS CREATING EFFECTS 7 From Effects Window Use sets and sequences to create an effect Cie Daba Preset Dota Color Poles Dala Beam Palette Data Herta pls Step 1 At Data menu select Effects Effects window will open Step 2 Using cursor enter sequence and set information for each effect Note One pre programmed set is available which contains all patched channels as a single part To use Set 0 enter O as the set number Step 3 Using keyboard label as required Assigns effect to autoload f into a specific submaster Sets Random time covered in Advanced Effects chapter Label Set Seq Dir Cycle Start Wave Bally 41 Forward Break Simul 1 05 1 01 Bluepop Ai d Braak Simul 048 053 0 Apple Break Simul Pd fetes pales 7 i A Breet Simul forward Break Simul Artrit Bresk Slmul l Fl A EI E H E Forward Braak Simul forward Break Simul Forward Break Si
330. y is automatically accepted pressing Clear to reset the command line keypad is not required e Because the keypad always defaults to channel entry mode use of the Chan channel button is optional ready channel Select a single channel e lt Chan gt n Enter Select multiple channels e lt Chan gt m n Enter Select a range of channels e lt Chan gt m Thru q Enter Other examples e lt Chan gt m s Thru w Enter 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A Shortcut gt MANUAL CONTROL CHANNEL SELECT 3 e lt Chan gt m s Thru w t Enter Clear Clear functions as a backspace key when used during command line construction For example lt Chan gt n Thru t Clear s Enter results in the selection of channels n thru s When Clear is used after an Enter fully terminated command line the command line is cleared The only thing that clears a syntax error on the command line is Clear Any other keypad entry is ignored until the error condition is cleared Holding down Clear will clear an entire unterminated command line From Channel Select Panel Optional Accessory Selecting channels from the optional Channel Select panel is basically the same as selecting channels in the Channel Select window although the special buttons associated with channel select are located on the console desk Millennium Buttons 000
331. y associates the soft thumbwheel address to the control channel Luminaire lamp power may be controlled by the SPC 36 interface In this case the patch combines the thumbwheel from the Smart Repeater unit and the corresponding thumbwheel from the SPC 36 interface to enable start douse and standby lamp functions as well as all parameter controls when the luminaire s control channel is selected Patch ON Patch ON is the default setting when opening a it patch is turned off new show file Patch must be turned on for select Turn Patch On channel selection to operate by channel number to enable patch again instead of thumbwheel address The Patch ON setting is available at the Patch menu The patch indicator lets you know whether patch is currently on or off Console 1 On Line Setup system config Asettings Plan view Paton 3D Location Patch Indicator 02 9668 0001A 30 Mar 01 25 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Note PATCH OFF will not allow control of DMX luminaires that have not been patched into the show file Setting Up Plan View Window Devices are patched using the Plan View window The Plan View appearance can be set up as required To setup plan view window Step 1 At Operation menu select Plan View Plan View window will open and 2D Display menu will become dering oe available on menu bar Step 2 At Patch menu select Enable Editing Icon bar and grid will appear in
332. y be required However in the event an unprotected connector is exposed to a contaminated environment the connector may require cleaning Refer to Virtuoso DX Console Service Manual 02 9668 0010 02 9668 0001A 12 April 01 15 VARI LITE VIRTUOSO DX CONSOLE USER S MANUAL Cleaning the Console Console Panel Surfaces In the event the console surface requires cleaning window cleaner can be used AN CAUTION Apply window cleaner to cloth first Do not spray directly on console panel surface Step Step Step Step Step 1 At Virtuoso menu select Shut Down 2 At rear of console set power switch to OFF position 3 4 5 Disconnect AC input cable from power source Apply window cleaner sparingly to clean white lint free cloth Wipe outside surface of console with cloth Console Displays In the event the console panel displays require cleaning 99 Isopropyl alcohol can be used AN CAUTION Use caution when handling displays Avoid touching or scratching optical surfaces Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 16 At Virtuoso menu select Shut Down At rear of console set power switch to OFF position Disconnect AC input cable from power source Apply a small amount of isopropyl alcohol to a clean white lint free cloth Clean displays by gently wiping with cloth 12 April 01 02 9668 0001A CHAPTER 2 Power Up and Patch This chapter shows you how to power up and patch your system so that you

Virtuoso DX Console User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents